Sei sulla pagina 1di 216

GE Medical Systems

Technical Publications
Direction 46017207
Revision 11

AMX-4 Series Diagnostics

Copyrighte 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1993, 1997, 1998, 1999 By General Electric Co.

Advanced Service Documentation Property of GE For GE Service Personnel Only No Rights Licensed Do Not Use or Copy Disclosure to Third Parties Prohibited

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

WARNING

D IF A CUSTOMERS SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMERS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES. D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD. D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.

D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE NEST DISPONIBLE QUEN ANGLAIS.

AVERTISSEMENT

D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE LANGUE QUE LANGLAIS, CEST AU CLIENT QUIL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE. D NE PAS TENTER DINTERVENTION SUR LES QUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE NA PAS T CONSULT ET COMPRIS. D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRANER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, LOPRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES DES DANGERS LECTRIQUES, MCANIQUES OU AUTRES.

WARNUNG

D DIESES KUNDENDIENSTHANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE. D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENTIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE BERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN. D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES KUNDENDIENSTHANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN WURDE. D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN.

D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS.

AVISO

D SI ALGN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA QUE NO SEA EL INGLS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIN. D NO SE DEBER DAR SERVICIO TCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO. D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELCTRICAS, MECNICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA.

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

ATENO

D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA DISPONVEL EM INGLS. D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIO DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA, QUE NO A GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIOS DE TRADUO. D NO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA. D O NO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANA DO TCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELTRICOS, MECNICOS OU OUTROS.

AVVERTENZA

D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN INGLESE. D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE. D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELLAPPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO. D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALLADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALLUTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.

ii

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Diagnostics Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Diagnostics Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Sys Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Charge Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENTERING DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Entering Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Entering Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Exit Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS FOR AMX4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46302688G1/46302687G1 OR 46303272G1/46303273G1 AND CPU BOARDS 46232828 OR 46264974 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 System Block Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Running System Block Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Op Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Running Op Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Loop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Demonstration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Enter Loop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Read a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Write Then Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS FOR AMX4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1, 46316685G1/46316686G1, OR 46329187G1 or G2/46329188G1 or G2 AND CPU BOARD 46264974 4-1 System Block Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Running System Block Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Op Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Running Op Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Loop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Demonstration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Enter Loop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Read a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Write Then Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE xiii 11 11 12 13 14 15 16 16 21 21 2-2 2-3

31 31 3-2 33 3-4 35 36 37 39 3-9 3-10 3-11

41 41 4-2 43 4-4 45 46 47 49 4-9 4-10 4-11

iii

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)


SECTION 5 TITLE I/O PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Selected Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Charger and Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 OnBoard Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 A/D Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Operator I/O Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Generator and AEC Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Generator Control 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Charger and Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 AEC Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Generator Control 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 A/D Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Set BackUp Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 OnBoard Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Right Speed Command DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Left Speed Command DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Charge Current DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Leakage Current Compensation DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Programmable Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Filament Current Demand DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 KVP Demand DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Watchdog Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Variables Unique To PROMS 46302688G1/46302687G1 and 46303272G1/46303273G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 kVp/mAs Display After Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Critical Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Force the Use of 137 kV in Tapcal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Force an Extended Charge Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DATA LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Enter Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 Enter View Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 Enter Initialize Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Load Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ERROR 7-1 7-2 721 722 7-3 7-4 7-5 LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Error List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initialize Error List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initialize Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 51 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 510 511 512 513 513 514 514 514 514 514 515 515 515 515 516 516 516 516 61 61 61 6-3 6-4 64 71 71 72 7-3 7-4 75 76 77

iv

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)


SECTION 8 TITLE CHARGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Entering Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DATA BASE ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Entering Data Base Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 Entering Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922 Exit Without Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Data Base Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Selecting Data Base Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Changing Data Base Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Check Sum and Limit Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Demonstration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971 Enter Data Base Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972 Change Field Light On-Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973 Test Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974 Enter Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975 Change Field Light On-Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976 Test Change Again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977 Enter Data Base Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 On Your Own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979 Return The Original Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Floor Scuffing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DATA BASE FOR AMX4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46302688G1/46302687G1 OR 46303272G1/46303273G1 AND CPU BOARDS 46232828 OR 46264974 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Calibratible XRay Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Auto Cal Filament Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Filament Current Calibration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Turns Ratio Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 System Resistance Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Charge Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Battery Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Field Light Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 81 81 82 91 91 91 9-2 9-3 93 94 94 94 94 9-5 9-6 9-6 9-7 9-7 9-7 9-8 9-8 9-8 98

10

101 101 105 106 107 108 109 1012 1017 1018

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)


SECTION 11 TITLE DATA BASE FOR AMX4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1, 46316685G1/46316686G1, OR 46329187G1 or G2/46329188G1 or G2 AND CPU BOARD 46264974 11-1 Calibratible XRay Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Filament Current Calibration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Turns Ratio Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 System Resistance Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Charge Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Battery Parameters for PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1 or 46316685G1/46316686G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Battery Parameters for PROMS 46329187G1 or G2/46329188G1 or G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Field Light Parameters for PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1 or 46316685G1/46316686G1 . . . . . . 11-10 Field Light Parameters for PROMS 46329187G1 or G2/46329188G1 or G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Auto Cal Filament Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Monitor Zero Capacity Millivolts for PROMS 46303815G1/ 46303816G1 or 46316685G1/46316686G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 Battery Aging Capacity Offset for PROMS 46329187G1 or G2/ 46329188G1 or G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ERROR 12-1 12-2 12-3 12-4 CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications Error Handling Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circular Error Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Histogram Of Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE

111 111 115 116 117 118 1111 1115 1116 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 121 121 121 121 121

12

13

THEORY 131 13-1 Powerup Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Visual Indication Of Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Power Up Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 80C31 Microcontroller Tests (test 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 EPROM Checksum Test (test 01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Ram Battery Test (test 02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 External Ram Test (test 03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Calibration Data Checksum Test (test 04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 8 1 Checksum By-pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Watchdog Timer Test (test 05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Programmable Interval Timer Test (test 06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 A/D Converter Circuitry Test (test 07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Application Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Charge Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 13 1 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS 46-302688G1/46-302687G1, 46-303272G1/46-303273G1 and 46-303815G1/46-303816G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 13 2 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS 46-316685G1/46-316686G1 . . . . . . . . . . . 13 13 3 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS 46-329187G1 or G2/46-329188G1 or G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi

131 131 131 132 132 132 132 132 13-3 134 134 134 134 135 13-5 13-7 13-9

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)


SECTION 13-14 13 14 1 13 14 2 13-15 13 15 1 13 15 2 13 15 3 13-16 13 16 1 13 16 2 13 16 3 13 16 4 13 16 5 13 16 6 13-17 13-18 13-19 13-20 13-21 13-22 13 22 1 13 22 2 13 22 3 13 22 4 13 22 5 13 22 6 13-23 13-24 13-25 13 25 1 13 25 2 13 25 3 13 25 4 13 25 5 13 25 6 13 25 7 13 25 8 13 25 9 13-26 13-27 13-28 TITLE PAGE

Battery Charge Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315 Battery Charger Run-Time Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Charging Diagnostics Display (Applies to PROMS 46-316685G1/ 46-316686G1 and Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315 Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Drive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Drive Control Software Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 Generator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321 Generator Control Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 Selecting The Proper KVp Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 Selecting The Proper Tap Relay Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Selecting The Proper Filament Current Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Auto Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Generator Control Diagnostics (Fault Detection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Field Light Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322 Bar Graph Control For Version 46302688G1/46302687G1 . . . . . . . 1323 Bar Graph Control For Version 46303272G1/46303273G1 or 46303815G1/46303816G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324 Bar Graph Control For Version 46316685G1/46316686G1 . . . . . . . 1325 Battery Aging for Firmware 46316685G1/46316686G1 and Earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326 Bar Graph Control For Version 46329187G1 or G2/46329188G1 or G2 (SMART GAUGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326 Discharge Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26 Emergency Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28 Recharge Phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28 Voltage Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32 Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32 Battery Aging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32 Heat Storage Tube Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333 Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333 Drive Handle Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33 Battery Charger Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33 Battery Voltmeter Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34 Generator Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34 mAs Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34 kVp Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34 Tap Relay Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35 Filament Current (X-ray Tube Characteristics) Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35 Field Light On Time Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36 Extended Diagnostics And Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336 Data Log Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336 Data Base Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336

vii

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)


SECTION 14 TITLE TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS AND SERVICE AIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Isolating Battery Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 1 1 Voltage Drop Under Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 CPU Dip Switch Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Generator Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3 1 Tube Spits During CALIBRATE TAPS" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3 2 X-ray Word Limit During CAL FIL CUR TBL" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3 3 Triggering - The Oscilloscope Prior to CALIBRATE kVp" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Synchronizing Internal Capacity Meter to Capacity Displayed (Firmware 46329187G1 or G2 and 46329188G1 or G2 Only) . . . . . BLOCK DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 Illustration Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 141 141 14-1 142 143 14-3 14-3 14-3 144 151 151

15

APPENDIX

DECIMAL, HEXADECIMAL AND BINARY EQUIVALENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A1

viii

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

REVISION HISTORY
REV 0 1 2 3 4 5 DATE Feb. 15, 1988 May 20, 1988 Sept. 15, 1989 Jan. 1, 1990 Jan. 25, 1991 Feb. 26, 1993 REASON FOR CHANGE Initial release. Complete diagnostics. Extensive programming changes. New PROMS, programming changes. New PROMS, extensive programming changes. Add new separate sections for new PROMS for System Diagnostics and for Data Base. Add new PROMS 46-316685G1/46-316686G1. Add Model Numbers 46-315161 Series. Deleted references to obsolete PROMS 46-279026G9/46-279150G8 and to Charger Board 46-232842G1 which are no longer in the field. Add Section 13-15-3, Drive Control Software Theory", and add Left & Right Drive Functional Flow" diagram to Section 15. Add PROMS 46-329187G1/46-329188G1. Add Model 46-329267 Series. Add Charger Board 46-288786G1. Corrected Monitor Full Capacity millivolts algoritm in Section 11. Changed name to AMX-4 Series Diagnostics;" added 2115090 and 2169360 models to effectivity (Section 1-1). Updated Sections 5-24 and 5-26. Updated Sections 4-5, 4-6-2, 4-6-3, 7-3, 9-7-1, 9-7-2, 9-7-5, 9-7-7. Added references to firmware 46-329187G2 and 46-329188G2 for Orion xray tube. Updated format for Avantx e-tools project.

6 7 8 9 10 10

Dec. 17, 1993 Feb. 17, 1997 Mar. 10, 1997 July 14, 1997 Apr. 12, 1999 Apr. 28, 2003

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES


PAGE NUMBER Title Page i thru xiv 1-1 thru 1-6 2-1 thru 2-4 3-1 thru 3-12 4-1 thru 4-12 REVISION NUMBER 11 11 11 11 11 11 PAGE NUMBER 5-1 thru 5-16 6-1 thru 6-4 7-1 thru 7-8 8-1 and 8-2 9-1 thru 9-8 10-1 thru 10-18 REVISION NUMBER 11 11 11 11 11 11 PAGE NUMBER 11-1 thru 11-22 12-1 thru 12-20 13-1 thru 13-36 14-1 thru 14-4 15-1 thru 15-24 A-1 and A-2 REVISION NUMBER 11 11 11 11 11 11

ix

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Direction 46017207
Revision 11

AMX4 Series Diagnostics

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION


X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use. Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation. It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the International Commission xi on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury. The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents, and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment. Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used. CAUTION: United States Federal law restricts this device to use by or on the order of a physician.

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

xii

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

If you have any comments, suggestions or corrections to the information in this document, please write them down, include the document title and document number, and send them to: GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY MEDICAL SYSTEMS MANAGER INFORMATION INTEGRATION, AMERICAS W622 P.O. BOX 414 MILWAUKEE, WI 532010414

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT


All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GEs electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of electrical codes. the applicable

The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GEs field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation damage in shipment written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or signed for by a General Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period. Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 8273449 / 8*2853449 immediately after damage is found. At this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item damaged and extent of damage. Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section S of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.
6/17/94

xiii

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

xiv

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

DIAGNOSTICS
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION
ILLUSTRATION 11 AMX4 IDENTIFICATION

RATING PLATE

1-1

General See Illustration 11. The AMX4 Series (henceforth, in this publication, called AMX4) is identified on the rating plate located on the top cover by Model Numbers 46270157Gx, 46315161Gx, 46329267Gx, 2115090x, 2169360x, 2236420x and any other model number associated with the AMX4 Series mobile xray equipment. This book is not intended to be read from cover to cover like a novel. It is intended to introduce you to the AMX4 Diagnostics Service Tools and provide reference material to help you isolate problems. You should be familiar with the operation and capabilities of Diagnostics before you need them. This book can help you with the process. Read Section 1 Introduction. It provides a brief overview of the diagnostics. Read Section 3-5 Loop Test or Section 4-5 Loop Test, as appropriate for the PROMS in this unit, and Section 9 Data Base Access. You will learn how to operate AMX4 Diagnostics and gain some insight into its capabilities by performing the Demonstration Procedures. You will need to change values between decimal, hexadecimal, and binary equivalents when using diagnostics. Many pocket calculators have functions to perform the conversions for you. However, a calculator is not always available when needed. Appendix 1 will help with conversions up to 16 bits or 4 hexadecimal characters when you are unable to use your calculator.

1-1

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

The AMX4 contains operating safeguards providing maximum safety. Before servicing, be certain proper operating procedures are being used. Refer to Direction 46017291 AMX4 Operation for Model Numbers 46270157G1, G2, G3, and G50. For Model Numbers 270157G4 and G5, refer to Direction 46017334, AMX4 (Japanese) Operation. For Model Numbers 46315161 and 46329267 Series, refer to Direction 46017531, AMX4 International Operation Manual (46315161 & 46329267 Series). For model numbers 2169360x and 2236420x, refer to Direction 2166913100, AMX4+ Operation Manual, and to Direction 2166911100, AMX4+ International Operation Manual.
ILLUSTRATION 12 PROM LOCATIONS ON CPU BOARDS

CALIBRATION PROM

DIAGNOSTICS & APPLICATION PROM

U6 U36

U51 U104

CPU BOARD 46-232828

CPU BOARD 46-264974

1-2

Diagnostics Identification Diagnostics are compatible with AMX4 Model Numbers 46270157, 46315161, 46329267, 2169360x and 2236420x Series. The PROM locations and identification numbers are shown in Illustration 12, PROM Locations On CPU Boards, and listed in Table 11, CPU Boards, Proms And Locations.

TABLE 11 CPU BOARDS, PROMS AND LOCATIONS CPU BOARD PROMS Diagnostics/Application Calibration PROMS Diagnostics/Application Calibration PROMS Diagnostics/Application Calibration PROMS Diagnostics/Application Calibration PROMS Diagnostics/Application Calibration PROMS Diagnostics/Application Calibration

46-232828 46-302688G1 U36 46-302687G1 U6 46-303272G1 U36 46-303273G1 U6 REV 0 REV 0 REV 0 REV 0

46-264974 46-302688G1 U104 REV 0 46-302687G1 U51 REV 0 46-303272G1 U104 REV 0 46-303273G1 U51 REV 0 46-303815G1 U104 REV 0 46-303816G1 U51 REV 0 46-316685G1 U104 REV 0 46-316686G1 U51 REV 0 46-329187G1 U104 REV 0 46-329188G1 U51 REV 0 46-329187G2 U104 REV 0 46-329188G2 U51 REV 0

NOT APPLICABLE NOT APPLICABLE NOT APPLICABLE NOT APPLICABLE

1-2

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 12 RELATED FMIS PROMS 46302688G1/46302687G1 46303272G1/46303273G1 RELATED FMIS FMI 10271 FMIS 10289 & 10291

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

46-303815G1/46-303816G1 46-316685G1/46-316686G1 46-329187G1/46-329188G1 46-329187G2/46-329188G2


ILLUSTRATION 13 DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM STRUCTURE

N/A FMI'S 10545 & 10546 N/A N/A

DIAGNOSTICS PROGRAM

END SERVC MODE

DIAGNOSIS ITEMS PASSWORD REQUIRED

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

DATA LOG

ERROR LOG

CHARGE BATTERYS

1-3

Diagnostics Menu Items The Diagnostics program bypasses the applications program and operator console control functions, providing control for fault isolation. Illustration 13 is a diagram of the Diagnostics program structure. The Diagnostics Menu has four choices: 1. 2. SYS DIAGNOSTICS DATA LOG Software routines to aid fault isolation. Loading, viewing and initializing of the Data Log

1-3

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 3. 4. ERROR LOG CHARGE BATTERYS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207 Viewing and initializing of the error log and error histogram files. Charge batteries when the AMX is not fully calibrated. Voltmeter and Charger must be calibrated.

ILLUSTRATION 14 SYS DIAGNOSTICS STRUCTURE

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

SYS BLOCK TEST

DISP CNTRL TEST

LOOP TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

DISP BATRY VOLTS

1-4

Sys Diagnostics As shown on Illustration 14, Diagnostics has the following menu items: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. SYS BLOCK TEST OP SWITCH TEST DISP CNTRL TEST DSP BATRY VOLTS LOOP TEST Checks selected blocks of circuitry. Displays the name of an operator accessible switch or switches that are closed. Exercises display controller to make sure all characters display correctly. Displays battery voltage. Continuously reads and writes to a specified address.

1-4

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 15 DATA LOG FUNCTIONS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

DATA LOG

VIEW DATA LOG

INIT DATA LOG

LOAD DATA LOG

1-5

Data Log As shown on Illustration 15, there are three Data Log functions: 1. 2. 3. View Initialize Load Data log View Data Log information. Sets all Data Log information to zero. Put information into specific Data Log ele ments.

1-5

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 16 ERROR LOG FUNCTIONS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

ERROR LOG

HISTOGRAMS

ERROR LIST

1-6

Error Log As shown on Illustration 16, there are two Error Log functions: 1. 2. Histograms Error List View and initialize the Histograms. View and initialize the Error List.

1-7

Charge Batteries Charge Batteries does not have additional menu selections. Follow the displayed prompts.

1-6

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 2 ENTERING DIAGNOSTICS


ILLUSTRATION 21 SERVICE SWITCH LOCATION

KEY SWITCH

SERVICE SWITCH IN LEFT SIDE

2-1

Entering Diagnostics Before using Diagnostics you must start the diagnostic program. To start the diagnostic program, perform the following steps: 1. Set the service switch shown on Illustration 2-1 up to the application position. 2. Reset the AMX-4 using one of the following methods. D D D If power is off, turn the Key Switch to the ON position. If power is on and the top cover is installed, turn the power key OFF for more than two seconds, then back ON again. If power is on and the top cover is removed, providing access to the processor board, press the processor reset switch (AMX1 A2 A1 S183 for CPU Board 46264974 or AMX1 A2 A1 S29 for CPU Board 46232828).

3. While Power Up tests are running, set the service switch down to the service position. When the diagnostic program is ready the END SERVC MODE menu selection appears on the Message Display.


2-1

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 22 DIAGNOSTIC MENU SELECTION

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

DIAGNOSTICS PROGRAM kVp B PREVIOUS kVp Y NEXT mAs B ENTER END SERVC MODE DIAGNOSIS ITEMS PASSWORD REQUIRED

mAs B ENTER

kVp B PREVIOUS

kVp Y NEXT

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

DATA LOG

ERROR LOG

CHARGER

After END SERVC MODE appears on the display, you must reach the DIAGNOSIS ITEMS menu selection. Illustration 22 shows diagnostics selection using the kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select DI AGNOSIS ITEMS. 1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B appears. until the DIAGNOSIS ITEMS menu selection

2. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to ENTER PASSWORD-- indicating that Data Base Access may be entered. 2-1-1 Entering Password Enter password. If password is not available, contact Service Engineering. After entering the password, the prompt changes to SYS DIAGNOSTICS indicating that Diagnostics has been entered. When an invalid password is entered, the display changes to INVALID ENTRY followed by PLEAS TRY AGAIN, then to DIAGNOSIS ITEMS. Press mAs B to reenter Diagnostics. If the password is not available, press mAs Y until the prompt INVALID ENTRY appears. The processor halts after three invalid entry attempts. Reset the processor by turning the key switch off.

2-2

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

2-1-2

Exit Diagnostics To exit DIAGNOSIS ITEMS press mAs Y when one of the menu selections shown on Illustration 22 displays. The prompt changes to EXITING------ then to DIAGNOSIS ITEMS indicating that Diagnostics is not active. Return to the applications program by performing the following steps: 1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B. displays. The END SERVICE MODE menu selection

2. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to SWITCH TO RUN. 3. Set the service switch up to the run position. The prompt changes to CYCLE KEY SWITCH. Turn the power key OFF for more than two seconds, then back ON again. 4. Check all functions you worked on to make sure they operate correctly.

2-3

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

2-4

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 SECTION 3 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS FOR AMX4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46302688G1/46302687G1 OR 46303272G1/46303273G1 AND CPU BOARDS 46232828 OR 46264974

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

System Diagnostics allows you to display the battery voltage, check for stuck switches, and check blocks of circuitry.
ILLUSTRATION 31 SYSTEM BLOCK TEST

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp B PREVIOUS mAs B ENTER

kVp Y NEXT

SYS BLOCK TESTS

DISP CNTRL TEST

LOOP TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

DISP BATRY VOLTS

3-1

System Block Test System Block Test checks the digital to analog and analog to digital converters. It also checks the tap selection circuitry.To check the D/A and A/D converters, DAC U332 on CPU 46232828 or U355 on CPU 46264974 is set up so that it will send a KVP DMN+ signal to the Filament and kVp Control Board. The signal is received by the Filament and kVp Control Board at J2 pins 11 and 12, schematic location 2D1. The signal leaves this board unaltered as KVP DMN FBK+ at J2 pins 13 and 14, schematic location 2E4, and returns to the CPU Board on connector J5 pins 13 and 14, schematic location 5E1. Analog buffer AR398 on CPU 46232828 or AR392 on CPU 46264974 conditions the signal for multiplexer U406 on CPU 46232828 or U342 on CPU 46264974. The signal is ultimately read by the processor and compared with the output signal. If they agree the test passes.

3-1

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Taps are checked by individuals selecting TAP1* through TAP5* signals at the Generator Control 2 Port, schematic location 4B9 on CPU board. The six tap signals go to six identical circuits on the 1kHz Driver Board, schematic sheet 2. On the 1kHz Driver Board these signals are converted to 110 volt coil driving signals and tap feed back logic signals. TAP1 FDBK through TAP5 FDBK return to the CPU board Generator and AEC Status port, schematic location 3E7. Tap select and feedback signals are compared. If they agree the test passes. By examining the tap feedback circuit, you can see that a shorted coil will produce a feedback signal. Keep this in mind when running System Block Test. You should hear six (see note) equally spaced clicks of the relays being selected when the tap test is running. If you dont, and the test passes, check the relays. Note that with this firmware, TAP6* is not tested. 3-1-1 Running System Block Test Illustration 31 shows Block Test selection using the kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select SYS BLOCK TESTS. 1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B until the SYS BLOCK TESTS menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs B. The test starts to run. The prompt changes to ANALOG TEST, then to TAP TEST. If the test passes, PASS appears after the prompt, if the test fails FAIL appears after the prompt. When Tap Test runs, you should hear six equally spaced clicks of the relays being selected. 3. End System Block Tests by Pressing and holding mAs Y until the display goes blank and the test stops. Release mAs Y. The test makes one last check, then the prompt changes to SYS BLOCK TESTS indicating that another selection may be made from the Diagnostics menu.

3-2

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 32 SWITCH TEST

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp B PREVIOUS mAs B ENTER

kVp Y NEXT

SYS BLOCK TESTS

DSP CNTRL TEST

LOOP TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

DSP BATRY VOLTS

3-2

Op Switch Test Op Switch looks for closed switches. When a closed switch is found, its name appears on the message display. If all switches are open the display prompts with NOSWITCH PRESSED. When more than one switch is pressed, they display tone after the other. Following is a list of switches checked, their signal names, and CPU Schematic locations: EXPOSE PREP FIELD LIGHT EXP SW J8- pin 23 sheet 3 location B-7, supplied from HAND SW COM J8 pin 24 sheet 3 location F-1. PREP SW J8 pin 25 sheet 3 location B-7, supplied from HAND SW COM J8 pin 24 sheet 3 location F-1. FIELD LIGHT SW and FIELD LIGHT SW RTN Collimator connection J3 pins 17 and 18, Hand Switch connections J8 pins 21 and 24 sheet 3 location F-1. Collimator loop passes through Rotor Control Board AMX 1 A3 A2, sheet 2. DRIVE ENA SW and DRIVE ENA SW RTN J8 pins 27 and 28 sheet 3 location D-1. TUBE PARKED SW and TUBE PARKED SW RTN J8 pins 13 and 14 sheet 3 location C-1 SERVICE SW and SERVICE SW RTN J8, 10 and 20 on sheet 4 location H-6. X-RAY PRESS SW and X-RAY PRESS SW RTN J3 pins 6 and 7 sheet 3 location C-8. This signal passes through Ro tor Control Board AMX 1 A3 A2 sheet 2. BUMPER* J2 pin 10 then to Drive Control Board AMX1 A5 A1 J11 pins 1 and 2 sheet 4 location E-1. LINE SENSE J1 pin 6 on sheet 3 location A-1. KVP UP J6 pin 5 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2 3-3

DRIVE ENABLE TUBE PARKED RUN HIGH TUBE PRESS

BUMPER CHARGING CORD KVP-UP

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 KVP-DWN MAS-DWN MAS-UP 3-2-1 Running Op Switch Test

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207 KVP DOWN J6 pin 13 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2 MAS DOWN J6 pin 7 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Dis play Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2 MAS UP J6 pin 5 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2

Illustration 32 shows OP Switch selection using the kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select OP SWITCH TEST. 1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B until the OP SWITCH TEST menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to NOSWITCH PRESSED indicating that the test is running. If a switch is closed, the name of the switch appears on the message display. 3. End the Op Switch Test by Pressing mAs Y. The prompt may not display mAs Y when pressed but change to OP SWITCH TEST indicating that another se lection may be made from the Diagnostics menu and that the mAs switch is func tioning correctly.

3-4

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 33 DISPLAY CONTROLLER TEST

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp B PREVIOUS mAs B ENTER

kVp Y NEXT

SYS BLOCK TESTS

DSP CNTRL TEST

LOOP TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

DSP BATRY VOLTS

3-3

Display Controller This test checks the Display Controller Module. Each display is checked to see that segments are not shorted, then they are checked to see that each segment lights. This is a visual test. Illustration 33 shows Display Controller Test selection using the kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select DISP CNTRL TEST. 1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B until the DISP CNTRL TEST menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs B. The test starts to run. 3. Press and hold mAs Y. When all displays are blank, release the switch. The prompt changes to DISP CNTRL TEST indicating that another selection may be made from the Diagnostics menu.

3-5

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 34 BATTERY VOLTAGE

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp B PREVIOUS mAs B ENTER

kVp Y NEXT

SYS BLOCK TEST

DISPCNTRL TEST

LOOP TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

DISP BATRY VOLTS

3-4

Battery Voltage Battery Voltage displays on the kVp and mAs Display. This may be used instead of removing covers to check battery voltage. The displayed voltage should match the actual voltage within +0.2 volts. Correct the display by using the calibration procedure Calibrate Voltmeter. Generator calibration must be done after calibrating the volt meter, if the voltage difference is more than 0.2 volts. Illustration 34 shows Battery Voltage selection using the kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select DISP BATRY VOLTS. 1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B until the DISP BATRY VOLTS menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to BATTERY VOLTS, and Battery voltage appears on the kVp and mAs Display. Each time you press mAs B, the battery voltage is sampled and displayed. 3. Press either kVp Y or kVp B to make your next selection from the Diagnos tics Menu. Battery voltage stays on the display until the display controller is reset by some other function.

3-6

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 35 LOOP TEST

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp B PREVIOUS

kVp Y NEXT mAs B ENTER

SYS BLOCK TEST

DISP CHTRL TEST

LOOP TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

DISP BATRY VOLTS

DEFINE ADDRESS

WRITE

READ

DATA

3-5

Loop Test Loop Test continuously reads a selected address, or writes data that you specify to a selected address. The prompt LOOPING appears on the Message Display while the test is running. Data being read or written appears on the kVp and mAs Display. Any CPU address bus location can be accessed with this test. Writing to RAM can corrupt the Calibration Data Base, producing a Check Sum Error. Calibration is required if this occurs. Limiting your use of Loop Test to the I/O ports listed in Section 5 will prevent this problem. Loop Test can be used to check circuits that are not tested by other portions of diagnostics. Command signals may be set, and feedback checked to see if circuits are functioning. You may use Loop Test for signal tracing by setting selected signals to a known state. When a potential fault is discovered, Loop Test may be used to set the signal high and low to verify the fault. Exit Diagnostics and turn the AMX OFF when you finish using Loop Test. This resets the system and makes sure the CPU Port Latches are properly set for other tests. (Setting the Service Switch up and down will also reset the latches.)

CAUTION

3-7

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Illustration 35 shows Loop Test selection using the kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B switches. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. Use the following steps to select LOOP TEST. 1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B until the LOOP TEST menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs B. The prompt DEFINE ADDRESS appears on the Message Dis play, and an address appears on the kVp and mAs Display. To exit without enter ing an address, press mAs Y. The prompt changes to EXITING------, then to LOOP TEST.
ILLUSTRATION 36 HEXADECIMAL REPRESENTATION

Addresses and data are changed starting with the left, or most significant, hexadecimal character and moving right to the least significant character. Notice the difference between hexadecimal B and 6 as shown on Illustration 36. It is easy to mistake a B for a 6. Address or Data appearing on the mAs and kVp display is entered when either mAs Y is pressed to enter the selection, or when mAs B is pressed to change the last value. 3. Change address by first pressing mAs B, then pressing kVp Y or kVp B to select the proper hexadecimal value. After the required value displays, press mAs B to enter the value and move to the next character. The prompt changes to -READ- when the last value is changed. 4. Using either kVp Y or kVp B, select -READ- to read the address or -WRITE- to write to the address. 5. Press mAs B at the prompt -READ- and the prompt changes to LOOP ING---. The address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display. Data will change if the bit pattern on the port changes. 6. Press mAs B at the prompt -WRITE- and the prompt changes to DATA. Change data by first pressing mAs B two times, then pressing kVp Y or kVp B to select the proper hexadecimal value. After the required value displays, press mAs B to enter the value and move to the next character. The prompt changes to LOOPING--- when the last value is changed. The address and data ap pear on the kVp and mAs display. 7. End the test by pressing mAs Y. The prompt changes to LOOP TEST indicat ing that another selection may be made from the Diagnostics menu.

3-8

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 37 LOOP TEST DISPLAY

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Address kVp

Data mAs kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

MESSAGE DISPLAY Prompts and Errors mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN Enter Value or Shift Data Entry

Increase Value kVp UP

kVp DOWN Decrease Value

3-6

Demonstration Procedure During this demonstration you will learn to operate Loop Test. You will see that Loop Test continually addresses a port.

3-6-1

Enter Loop Test Illustrations 35 and 37 show Loop Test selection. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. See Illustration 37. Loop Test prompts appear on the Message Display. Address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display. Address and data are the Hexadecimal equivalent of a Decimal number. Enter Loop Test by performing the following steps: 1. Enter the Service Mode by placing the service switch up to the application posi tion and turn the unit ON. While Power Up tests are running set the service switch down to the service position. After completing power up diagnostics, the display changes to END SERVC MODE. 2. Display the DIAGNOSIS ITEMS menu selection by Pressing kVp Y. 3. Enter Diagnostics by pressing mAs B. The prompt changes to ENTER PASS WORD--. 4. Enter the password. The prompt changes to SYS DIAGNOSTICS. 5. Enter System Diagnostics by pressing mAs B. The prompt changes to SYS BLOCK TEST. 6. Select Loop Test from the System Diagnostics Menu by pressing kVp B. The prompt changes to LOOP TEST. 7. Enter Loop Test by pressing mAs B. The prompt changes to DEFINE AD DRESS, and an address 0000 Hex appears on the kVp and mAs display. You are now ready to use Loop Test.

3-9

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 38 READ PORT DISPLAY 1000 kVp

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data mAs kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

MESSAGE DISPLAY Prompts and Errors mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN Enter Value or Shift Data Entry

Increase Value kVp UP Decrease Value kVp DOWN

3-6-2

Read a Port You will read the Charger and Drive Status Port at location 1000 Hex. This port is read by Op Switch Test to display a closed switch. Refer to Section 5-3 Charger and Drive Status for signal identification. By pressing switches you will see that the port is continually being read and the result displayed. Read the Charger and Drive Status Port by performing the following steps: 1. Enter Loop Test as described in Section 3 6 1 Enter Loop Test. 2. Press kVp Y and kVp B. You haven't selected a character so nothing happens. 3. Select the first character by pressing mAs B. 4. Press kVp Y and kVp B to see how the first address character changes, then change it to 1. The address 1000 Hex should display as shown on Illustration 3-8. 5. Select the second character by pressing mAs B. Press kVp Y and kVp B to see how the second address character changes then change it to 0. 6. Step past the next two characters and enter the address by pressing mAs B three times. The prompt changes to -READ-. 7. Press kVp Y and kVp B. The prompt changes between -READ- and -WRITE-. Select -READ- and press mAs B. The prompt changes to -LOOPING-. The address and data appear on the kVp and mAs Display. Data may indicate that the Left Stall or Right Stall signals are active. This is normal because the processor did not reset the Drive Control Board. 8. Press the Drive Enable Switch, Tube Parked Switch, and Bumper. Data changes when any of the switches close. By pressing the switches you should be able to satisfy your self that the port is continuously read and its Hexadecimal value dis played.

3-10

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 3-6-3 Write Then Read

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

You will activate tap relays by writing to the Generator Control 2 Port located at 1000 Hex. By reading the Generator and AEC Status Port at 1600 Hex you will see that the relays are active. Refer to Section 5-8 Generator Control 2 and Section 5-7 Generator and AEC Status for signal identification. These two ports are used by Block Test when it checks the tap relays. Select Port 1000 Hex. 1. Enter Loop Test as described in Section 3-6-1 Enter Loop Test. 2. Select the first character of the port address by pressing mAs B. 3. Change this character to 1 by pressing kVp Y or kVp B. 4. Step past the next two characters and enter the address by pressing mAs B three times. The prompt changes to -READ-. Enter 38 Hex, energizing tap selection relays 1, 2, and 3. 5. Change the prompt to -WRITE- by pressing kVp Y or kVp B.

6. Select the first character by pressing mAs B two times. 7. Change the first character to 3 by pressing kVp Y or kVp B, then press mAs B to select the second character. 8. Change the second character to 8, then enter the value by pressing mAs B. The relays pull in and the prompt -LOOPING- displays. 9. Exit Loop Test by pressing mAs Y. The prompt changes to LOOP TEST. Re lays remain pulled in because the port latch was not reset. Reenter Loop Test and read the Generator and AEC Status Port at 1600 Hex. 10. Enter Loop Test. 11. Select the Generator and AEC Status Port at location 1600 Hex using kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B. 12. Read the port by selecting the -READ- prompt and pressing mAs B. Depending on the status of bit 7, AEC EXP EN, the data will either be 07 Hex or 87 Hex. Reset the Generator Control Port by writing 00 Hex to location 1000 Hex. You will hear the relays drop out when the data is written to the port.

3-11

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

3-12

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 SECTION 4 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS FOR AMX4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1, 46316685G1/ 46316686G1, OR 46329187G1/46329188G1 OR 46329187G2/46329188G2 AND CPU BOARD 46264974

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

System Diagnostics allows you to display the battery voltage, check for stuck switches, and check blocks of circuitry.
ILLUSTRATION 41 SYSTEM BLOCK TEST

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp B PREVIOUS mAs B ENTER

kVp Y NEXT

SYS BLOCK TESTS

DISP CNTRL TEST

LOOP TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

DISP BATRY VOLTS

4-1

System Block Test System Block Test checks the digital to analog and analog to digital converters. It also checks the tap selection circuitry.To check the D/A and A/D converters, DAC U355 on CPU 46264974, is set up so that it will send a KVP DMN+ signal to the Filament and kVp Control Board. The signal is received by the Filament and kVp Control Board at J2 pins 11 and 12, schematic location 2D1. The signal leaves this board unaltered as KVP DMN FBK+ at J2 pins 13 and 14, schematic location 2E4, and returns to the CPU Board on connector J5 pins 13 and 14, schematic location 5E1. Analog buffer AR392 on CPU 46264974 conditions the signal for multiplex U342 on CPU 46264974. The signal is ultimately read by the processor and compared with the output signal. If they agree the test passes.

4-1

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Taps are checked by individuals selecting TAP1* through TAP6* signals at the Generator Control 2 Port, schematic location 4B9. The six tap signals go to six identical circuits on the 1kHz Driver Board, schematic sheet 2. On the 1kHz Driver Board these signals are converted to 110 volt coil driving signals and tap feed back logic signals. TAP1 FDBK through TAP6 FDBK return to the CPU board Generator and AEC Status port, schematic location 3E7. Tap select and feedback signals are compared. If they agree the test passes. By examining the tap feedback circuit, you can see that a shorted coil or stuck contacts will produce a feedback signal. Keep this in mind when running System Block Test. You should hear seven equally spaced clicks of the relays being selected when the tap test is running. If you dont, and the test passes, check the relays. 4-1-1 Running System Block Test Illustration 41 shows Block Test selection using the kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select SYS BLOCK TESTS. 1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B until the SYS BLOCK TESTS menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs B. The test starts to run. The prompt changes to ANALOG TEST, then to TAP TEST. If the test passes, PASS appears after the prompt, if the test fails FAIL appears after the prompt. When Tap Test runs, you should hear seven equally spaced clicks of the relays being selected. 3. End System Block Tests by Pressing and holding mAs Y until the display goes blank and the test stops. Release mAs Y. The test makes one last check, then the prompt changes to SYS BLOCK TESTS indicating that another selection may be made from the Diagnostics menu.

4-2

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 42 SWITCH TEST

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp B PREVIOUS mAs B ENTER

kVp Y NEXT

SYS BLOCK TESTS

DSP CNTRL TEST

LOOP TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

DSP BATRY VOLTS

4-2

Op Switch Test Op Switch looks for closed switches. When a closed switch is found, its name appears on the message display. If all switches are open the display prompts with NOSWITCH PRESSED. When more than one switch is pressed, they display tone after the other. Following is a list of switches checked, their signal names, and CPU Schematic locations: EXPOSE PREP FIELD LIGHT EXP SW J8- pin 23 sheet 3 location B-7, supplied from HAND SW COM J8 pin 24 sheet 3 location F-1. PREP SW J8 pin 25 sheet 3 location B-7, supplied from HAND SW COM J8 pin 24 sheet 3 location F-1. FIELD LIGHT SW and FIELD LIGHT SW RTN Collimator connection J3 pins 17 and 18, Hand Switch connections J8 pins 21 and 24 sheet 3 location F-1. Collimator loop passes through Rotor Control Board AMX 1 A3 A2 sheet 2. DRIVE ENA SW and DRIVE ENA SW RTN J8 pins 27 and 28 sheet 3 location D-1. TUBE PARKED SW and TUBE PARKED SW RTN J8 pins 13 and 14 sheet 3 location C-1 SERVICE SW and SERVICE SW RTN J8, 10 and 20 on sheet 4 location H-6. X-RAY PRESS SW and X-RAY PRESS SW RTN J3 pins 6 and 7 sheet 3 location C-8. This signal passes through Ro tor Control Board AMX 1 A3 A2 sheet 2. BUMPER* J2 pin 10 then to Drive Control Board AMX1 A5 A1 J11 pins 1 and 2 sheet 4 location E-1. LINE SENSE J1 pin 6 on sheet 3 location A-1. KVP UP J6 pin 5 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2

DRIVE ENABLE TUBE PARKED RUN HIGH TUBE PRESS

BUMPER CHARGING CORD KVP-UP

4-3

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 KVP-DWN MAS-DWN MAS-UP

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207 KVP DOWN J6 pin 13 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2 MAS DOWN J6 pin 7 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Dis play Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2 MAS UP J6 pin 5 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2

4-2-1

Running Op Switch Test Illustration 42 shows OP Switch selection using the kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select OP SWITCH TEST. 1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B until the OP SWITCH TEST menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to NOSWITCH PRESSED indicating that the test is running. If a switch is closed, the name of the switch appears on the message display. 3. End the Op Switch Test by Pressing mAs Y. The prompt may not display mAs Y when pressed but change to OP SWITCH TEST indicating that another se lection may be made from the Diagnostics menu and that the mAs switch is func tioning correctly.

4-4

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 43 DISPLAY CONTROLLER TEST

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp B PREVIOUS mAs B ENTER

kVp Y NEXT

SYS BLOCK TESTS

DSP CNTRL TEST

LOOP TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

DSP BATRY VOLTS

4-3

Display Controller This test checks the Display Controller Module. Each display is checked to see that segments are not shorted, then they are checked to see that each segment lights. Illustration 43 shows Display Controller Test selection using the kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select DISP CNTRL TEST. 1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B until the DISP CNTRL TEST menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs B. The test starts to run. 3. Press and hold mAs Y. When all displays are blank, release the switch. The prompt changes to DISP CNTRL TEST indicating that another selection may be made from the Diagnostics menu.

4-5

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 44 BATTERY VOLTAGE

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp B PREVIOUS mAs B ENTER

kVp Y NEXT

SYS BLOCK TEST

DISPCNTRL TEST

LOOP TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

DISP BATRY VOLTS

4-4

Battery Voltage Battery Voltage displays on the kVp and mAs Display. This may be used instead of removing covers to check battery voltage. The displayed voltage should match the actual voltage within +0.2 volts. Correct the display by using the calibration procedure Calibrate Voltmeter. Generator calibration must be done after calibrating the volt meter, if the voltage difference is more than 0.2 volts. Illustration 44 shows Battery Voltage selection using the kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select DISP BATRY VOLTS. 1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B until the DISP BATRY VOLTS menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to BATTERY VOLTS, and Battery voltage appears on the kVp and mAs Display. Each time you press mAs B, the battery voltage is sampled and displayed. 3. Press either kVp Y or kVp B to make your next selection from the Diagnos tics Menu. Battery voltage stays on the display until the display controller is reset by some other function.

4-6

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 45 LOOP TEST

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp B PREVIOUS

kVp Y NEXT mAs B ENTER

SYS BLOCK TEST

DISP CHTRL TEST

LOOP TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

DISP BATRY VOLTS

DEFINE ADDRESS

SELECT HEXADECIMAL OR BINARY FORMAT

WRITE

READ

DATA

4-5

Loop Test Loop Test continuously reads a selected address, or writes data that you specify to a selected address. The prompt LOOPING appears on the Message Display while the test is running. Data being read or written appears on the kVp and mAs Display. Any CPU address bus location can be accessed with this test. Writing to RAM can corrupt the Calibration Data Base, producing a Check Sum Error. Calibration is required if this occurs. Limiting your use of Loop Test to the I/O ports listed in Section 4 will prevent this problem. Loop Test can be used to check circuits that are not tested by other portions of diagnostics. Command signals may be set, and feedback checked to see if circuits are functioning. You may use Loop Test for signal tracing by setting selected signals to a known state. When a potential fault is discovered, Loop Test may be used to set the signal high and low to verify the fault. Exit Diagnostics and turn the AMX OFF when you finish using Loop Test. This resets the system and makes sure the CPU Port Latches are properly set for other tests. (Setting the Service Switch up, and then down will also reset the latches.)

CAUTION

4-7

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Illustration 45 shows Loop Test selection using the kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B switches. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. Use the following steps to select LOOP TEST. 1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B until the LOOP TEST menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs B. The prompt DEFINE ADDRESS appears on the Message Dis play, and an address appears on the kVp and mAs Display. To exit without enter ing an address, press mAs Y twice. The prompt changes to EXITING------, then to LOOP TEST.
ILLUSTRATION 46 HEXADECIMAL REPRESENTATION

Addresses and data are changed starting with the left, or most significant, hexadecimal character and moving right to the least significant character. Notice the difference between hexadecimal B and 6 as shown on Illustration 46. It is easy to mistake a B for a 6. Address or Data appearing on the mAs and kVp display is entered when either mAs Y is pressed to enter the selection, or when mAs B is pressed to change the last value. 3. Change address by first pressing mAs B, then pressing kVp Y or kVp B to select the proper hexadecimal value. After the required value displays, press mAs B to enter the value and move to the next character. Note that the digit being changed will flash. 4. The messages MAS UP for HEX ",MAS DN for BIN" will alternate on the display. Pressing MASY will display in hexadecimal format. Pressing MASB will display data in a binary format. The prompt changes to -READ-. Using either kVp Y or kVp B, -READ- to read the address or -WRITE- to write to the address. select

5.

6. Press mAs B at the prompt -READ- and the prompt changes to LOOP ING---. The address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display. Data will change if the bit pattern on the port changes. Only data will appear if binary format is selected. 7. Press mAs B at the prompt -WRITE- and the prompt changes to DATA. Change data by first pressing mAs B two times, then pressing kVp Y or kVp B to select the proper hexadecimal or binary value. After the required value dis plays, press mAs B to enter the value and move to the next character. The digit will flash. The prompt changes to LOOPING--- when the last value is changed. The address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display. Only data will appear if binary format is selected. 8. End the test by pressing mAs Y. The prompt changes to LOOP TEST indicating that another selection may be made from the Diagnostics menu.

4-8

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 47 LOOP TEST DISPLAY Binary Mode Data

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

or Hexadecimal Mode Address and Data

kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

MESSAGE DISPLAY Prompts and Errors mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN Enter Value or Shift Data Entry

Increase Value kVp UP

kVp DOWN Decrease Value

4-6

Demonstration Procedure During this demonstration you will learn to operate Loop Test. You will see that Loop Test continually addresses a port.

4-6-1

Enter Loop Test Illustrations 45 and 47 show Loop Test selection. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. See Illustration 47. Loop Test prompts appear on the Message Display. Address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display. Address and data are the Hexadecimal equivalent of a Decimal number. Enter Loop Test by performing the following steps: 1. Enter the Service Mode by placing the service switch up to the application posi tion and turn the unit ON. While Power Up tests are running set the service switch down to the service position. After completing power up diagnostics, the display changes to END SERVC MODE. 2. Display the DIAGNOSIS ITEMS menu selection by Pressing kVp Y. 3. Enter Diagnostics by pressing mAs B. The prompt changes to ENTER PASS WORD--. 4. Enter the password. The prompt changes to SYS DIAGNOSTICS. 5. Enter System Diagnostics by pressing mAs B. The prompt changes to SYS BLOCK TEST. 6. Select Loop Test from the System Diagnostics Menu by pressing kVp B. The prompt changes to LOOP TEST. 7. Enter Loop Test by pressing mAs B. The prompt changes to DEFINE AD DRESS, and an address 0000 Hex appears on the kVp and mAs display. You are now ready to use Loop Test.

4-9

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 48 READ PORT DISPLAY 1000 kVp

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data mAs kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

MESSAGE DISPLAY Prompts and Errors mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN Enter Value or Shift Data Entry

Increase Value kVp UP

Decrease Value

kVp DOWN

4-6-2

Read a Port You will read the Charger and Drive Status Port at location 1000 Hex. This port is read by Op Switch Test to display a closed switch. Refer to Section 5-3 Charger and Drive Status for signal identification. By pressing switches you will see that the port is continually being read and the result displayed. Read the Charger and Drive Status Port by performing the following steps: 1. Enter Loop Test as described in Section 4 6 1 Enter Loop Test. 2. Press kVp Y and kVp B. You haven't selected a character so nothing happens. 3. Select the first character by pressing mAs B. 4. Press kVp Y and kVp B to see how the first address character changes, then change it to 1. The address 1000 Hex should display as shown on Illustration 4-8. The digit being changed will flash. 5. Select the second character by pressing mAs B. Press kVp Y and kVp B to see how the second address character changes then change it to 0. 6. Step past the next two characters and enter the address by pressing mAs B three times. The messages MAS UP for HEX ",MAS DN for BIN" will alter nate on the display. Pressing MASY will display in hexadecimal format. Press ing MASB will display data in a binary format. 7. The prompt changes to -READ-. Press kVp Y and kVp B. The prompt changes between -READ- and -WRITE-. Select -READ- and press mAs B. The prompt changes to -LOOPING-. The address and data appear on the kVp and mAs Display.

Data may indicate that the Left Stall and/or Right Stall signals are active. This is normal because the processor did not reset the Drive Control Board. 8. Press Drive Enable Switch, Tube Parked Switch, and Bumper. Data changes when any of switches close. By pressing switches you should be able to satisfy your self that port is continuously read and its Hexadecimal value displayed.

4-10

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 4-6-3 Write Then Read

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

You will activate tap relays by writing to the Generator Control 2 Port located at 1000 Hex. By reading the Generator and AEC Status Port at 1600 Hex you will see that the relays are active. Refer to Section 5-8 Generator Control 2 and Section 5-7 Generator and AEC Status for signal identification. These two ports are used by Block Test when it checks the tap relays. Select Port 1000 Hex. 1. Enter Loop Test as described in Section 4 6 1 Enter Loop Test. 2. Select the first character of the port address by pressing mAs B. 3. Change this character to 1 by pressing kVp Y or kVp B. 4. Step past the next two characters and enter the address by pressing mAs B three times. Press mAs Y for Hexadecimal. Press mAs B for Binary. The prompt changes to -READ-. Enter 38 Hex, energizing tap selection relays 1, 2, and 3. 5. Change the prompt to -WRITE- by pressing kVp Y or kVp B. 6. Select the first character by pressing mAs B two times. 7. Change the first character to 3 by pressing kVp Y or kVp B, then press mAs B to select the second character. 8. Change the second character to 8, then enter the value by pressing mAs B. The relays pull in and the prompt -LOOPING- displays. 9. Exit Loop Test by pressing mAs Y. The prompt changes to LOOP TEST. Re lays remain pulled in because the port latch was not reset. Reenter Loop Test and read the Generator and AEC Status Port at 1600 Hex. 10. Enter Loop Test. 11. Select the Generator and AEC Status Port at location 1600 Hex using kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B. 12. Read the port by selecting the -READ- prompt and pressing mAs B. Depending on the status of bit 7, AEC EXP EN, the data will either be 07 Hex or 87 Hex. Reset the Generator Control Port by writing 00 Hex to location 1000 Hex. (Setting the Service Switch up and down will also reset the Generator Control Port) You will hear the relays drop out when the data is written to the port.

4-11

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

4-12

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 5 I/O PORTS 5-1 Introduction This section contains listings of CPU Port addresses, signal names, and schematic locations. Using Loop Test, you can read from and write to these ports. Tables 51 and 52 cross reference the read and write port select signals with the hex address, port name, and section where signal descriptions are located. These signals originate at U78 on CPU 46232828 or U170 on CPU 46264974 and U139 on CPU 46232828 or U24 on CPU 46264974. Signal names appear along the right edge of CPU Schematic page two.
TABLE 51 READ PORTS

Signal Name

Address Hex

Port Name

Section

RDP0* RDP1* RDP2* RDP3* RDP4* RDP5* RDP6*


TABLE 52 WRITE PORTS

1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600

Charger and Drive Status 53 On Board Status 54 A/D Converter 55 Not Used Operator I/O Status 56 Programmable Timer Not Described Generator and AEC Status 57

Signal Name

Address Hex

Port Name

Section

WRP0* WRP1* WRP2* WRP3* WRP4* WRP5* WRP6* WRP7* WRP8* WRP9* WRP10* WRP11* WRP12* WRP13* WRP14* WRP15*

1000 1080 1100 1180 1200 1280 1300 1380 1400 1401 1480 1481 1500 1580 1584 1600 1680 1700 1780

Generator Control 2 58 Not Used Charger and Drive Control AEC Control 510 Generator Control 1 511 A/D Control 512 Set Backup Time 513 On Board Control 514 Right Speed Command DAC Left Speed Command DAC Charge Current DAC 517 Leakage Compensation DAC Programmable Timer 519 Filament Current Demand DAC kVp Demand DAC 521 Watchdog Timer 522 Not Used Not Used Not Used

59

515 516 518 520

5-1

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

5-2

Selected Functions This table lists selected functions with their address and data. You may activate these functions by writing the data value to the address listed for the function. When finished, always reset any port that you wrote to by writing 00 Hex to it, or resetting the CPU.

TABLE 53 SELECTED FUNCTIONS PORT

Address Function
Hex Value

Data
Hex Value

60 Hz Clocks Turns on 60 Hz clocks to 60 Hz Inverter. 1k Hz Clocks Turns on 1k Hz clocks to the 1k Hz Inverter. 2k Hz Clocks Turns on 2k Hz and 16k Hz clocks to the 1k Hz Inverter. Field Light Turns on the Collimator Field Light. 2k Hz Filament Inverter Turns on the 2k Hz filament inverter at 4.5 Amps. Turn the Rotor On First enter Then enter Pull in Safety Contactor Press the PREP switch Charge at 2.5 Amps Plug in charging cord First enter Then enter

1200

01

1200

02

1200

04

1200 1200

11 15

1000 1200 1000

02 11 04

1100 1480

04 80

5-2

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

5-3

Charger and Drive Status Read only port with address location 1000 hex. Schematic location; sheet 3, 1A to 1D. Port select signal is RDP0*.

TABLE 54 CHARGER AND DRIVE STATUS PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LINE SENSE OPTION SW 3 OPTION SW 4 BUMPER TUBE PARKED SW LEFT STALL RIGHT STALL DRIVE ENA SW

DESCRIPTION Logic 1 charger is plugged in to a live socket. Logic 1 selects English prompts. Logic 0 selects French prompts. (Not used) Logic 1 bumper switch is engaged, something was hit. Logic 1 xray tube arm is locked in place. Logic 0 xray tube arm is not locked in place. Logic 1 left drive motor has overheated or stalled. Logic 1 right drive motor has overheated or stalled. Logic 1 drive enable bar is activated.

5-3

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

5-4

OnBoard Status Read only port with address location 1100 hex. Schematic location; sheet 4, 7F to 7H. Port select signal is RDP1*.

TABLE 55 ONBOARD STATUS PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME 0 1 2 3 BU TMR OKAY EXP CMND STATUS A/D STATUS XMIT OK

DESCRIPTION Logic 1 backup exposure timer has not timed out Indicates the status of the hardware synchronized START EXP CMND signal Logic 1 conversion is in progress Logic 1 sending data to the display without flicker Logic 0 sending data to display causes flicker Note that this bit toggles while displayed. This is a normal condition.

4 5 6 7 **

DISPLAY OK BAUD RATE SW OPTION SW 1 SERVICE SW **

Logic 1 display controller is scanning Logic 1 selects 375k Baud Logic 0 selects 187.5k Baud Logic 1 enable +24, 15V tests Logic 0 disable +24, 15V tests Logic 1service mode requested

Do not select for CPU board 46232828.

5-4

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

5-5

A/D Converter Port select signal is RDP2*. Start 8-bit Conversion Read only port with address location 1201 hex. Schematic location; sheet 5. Reading from this address with the READ A/D signal = 0,starts an 8bit conversion (data read in this case is irrelevant). Start 12-bit Conversion Read only port with address location 1200 hex. Schematic location; sheet 5. Reading from this address with the READ A/D signal = 0, starts a 12bit conversion (data read in this case is irrelevant). Read A/D MSB Read only port with address location 1200 hex. Schematic location; sheet 5. Reading from this address with the READ A/D signal = 1, reads the 8 most significant bits of the A/D output. Read A/D LSB Read only port with address location 1201 hex. Schematic location; sheet 5. Reading from this address with the READ A/D signal = 1, reads the 4 least significant bits of the 12bit A/D output followed by the 4 trailing zeroes in the least significant nibble.

5-5

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

5-6

Operator I/O Status Read only port with address location 1400 hex. Schematic location; sheet 3, 1D to 1H. Port select signal is RDP4*.

TABLE 56 OPERATOR I/O STATUS PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SER PORT EN KEY SWITCH ON OPTION SW 2 FIELD LIGHT SW MAS UP MAS DOWN KVP UP KVP DOWN

DESCRIPTION Logic 1 serial port is to be enabled Logic 1 key switch is in the ON position. Logic 1 cycles CPU at PowerUp. Logic 0 normal run mode. Logic 1 field light switch is pressed. Logic 1 MAS UP switch is pressed Logic 1 MAS DOWN switch is pressed Logic 1 KVP UP switch is pressed Logic 1 KVP DOWN switch is pressed.

5-6

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

5-7

Generator and AEC Status Read only port with address location 1600 hex. Schematic location; sheet 3, 5D to 1H. Tap feedback signals originate on the 1 kHz driver board. Tap selection is through the Generator Control 2 port. Tap numbers and tap selection relay numbers are the same. Tap 6 and relay K6 should not be active during applications. Port select signal is RDP6*.

TABLE 57 GENERATOR AND AEC STATUS PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TAP 1 FDBK TAP 2 FDBK TAP 3 FDBK TAP 4 FDBK TAP 5 FDBK TAP 6 FDBK AEC ON AEC EXP EN

DESCRIPTION Logic 1 tap 1 signal was received by the 1khz inverter Logic 1 tap 2 signal was received by the 1khz inverter Logic 1 tap 3 signal was received by the 1khz inverter Logic 1 tap 4 signal was received by the 1khz inverter Logic 1 tap 5 signal was received by the 1khz inverter Logic 1 tap 6 signal was received by the 1khz inverter Logic 1 when Automatic Exposure Control is selected. Allows AEC EXP EN to terminate exposure. Logic 1 exposure allowed when AEC ON is active. Logic 0 exposure stops when AEC ON is active. Logic 1 when AEC is not installed.

TABLE 58 KVP TAP SELECTION RELAY

HEX

msbK6 K5

K4

K3

K2

lsbK1

5-7

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

00H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H 08H 09H 0AH 0BH 0CH 0DH 0EH 0FH 10H 20H 30H

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0

40H = AEC ON 80H = AEC EXP EN C0H = AEC ON and AEC EXP EN

5-8

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

5-8

Generator Control 2 Write only port with address location 1000 hex. Schematic location; sheet 4, 9B. Port select signal is WRP0*.

TABLE 59 GENERATOR CONTROL 2 PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME 0 1 TAP 6 ROTOR SELECT

DESCRIPTION Logic 1 selects tap relay 6 Logic 1 pulls in a relay which enables current to flow through the stator. If this relay is not pulled in, the field lamp circuit is enabled. Logic 1 pulls in a relay whose contacts pull in the safety contactor which supplies power to the 1 khz inverter. In addition, the prep switch must be depressed in order to pull in the safety contactor. Logic 1 selects tap relay 1 Logic 1 selects tap relay 2 Logic 1 selects tap relay 3 Logic 1 selects tap relay 4 Logic 1 selects tap relay 5

SAFETY CONT ENB

3 4 5 6 7

TAP 1 TAP 2 TAP 3 TAP 4 TAP 5

5-9

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

5-9

Charger and Drive Control Write only port with address 1100 hex. Schematic location; sheet 4, 11D to 11F. Port select signal is WRP2*.

TABLE 510 CHARGER AND DRIVE CONTROL PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TRIP BREAKER CHARGE SCALESELECT CHARGER RELAY REVERSE ONLY FULL SPD ENA MOTOR ENA DRIVE RESET BAT V & CHARGE CUR SEL

DESCRIPTION Logic 1 trips the circuit breaker. Logic 1 sets charger to trickle charge rate. Logic 0 sets charger to full charge rate. Logic 1 connects isolation transformer to charger. Logic 1 motion is allowed in reverse only. Logic 1 enables peak drive speed. Logic 0 limits drive speed. Logic 1 connects the motor drives to the motors and releases the brakes. Logic 1 resets the drive boards. Logic 1 selects charge current feedback. Logic 0 selects battery voltage feedback.

5-10

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

5-10

AEC Control Write only port with address location 1180 hex. Schematic location; sheet 3, 5A. KVP0 to KVP4 gives the selected KVP when prep is entered. Port select signal is WRP3*.

TABLE 511 AEC CONTROL PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 KVP0 KVP1 KVP2 KVP3 KVP4 KVP5 KVP6 GEN READY

DESCRIPTION

Not Used Not Used Not Used

TABLE 512 KVP SELECTION

kVp 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125

HEX 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H 08H 09H 0AH 0BH 0CH 0DH 0EH 0FH 10H 11H 12H 13H 15H 15H 16H 17H 18H 19H

kVp4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

kVp3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

kVp2 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0

kVp1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

kVp0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

5-11

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

5-11

Generator Control 1 Write only port with address location 1200 hex. Schematic location; sheet 6, 7B. Port select signal is WRP4*.

TABLE 513 GENERATOR CONTROL 1 PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 60HZ EN 1kHZ EN 2kHz EN LOW RESOLUTION 60 Hz RELAY PREHEAT START EXP

DESCRIPTION Logic 1 enables both 60Hz phase 1 and 2 clocks Logic 1 enables both 1 kHz phase 1 and 2 clocks to the1 kHz inverter Logic 1 enables both 2 kHz phase 1 and 2 clocks and 16 kHz clock to the Filament control board. Logic 1 selects low timer resolution for mAs >=12.5 Logic 0 selects high timer resolution for mAs <12.5 Logic 1 brings power to the 60 Hz Inverter. Logic 1 turns on filament preheat; boosts the filament Logic 1 initiates the exposure hardware synchronizes this signal to the 1 kHz clock. This signal must be pulsed <10mS. Logic 1 terminates the exposure hardware synchronizes this signal to the 1 kHz clock. This signal must be pulsed <10mS.

STOP EXP

5-12

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

5-12

A/D Control Write only port with address 1280 hex. Schematic location; sheet 5 6E. AMUX0 through AMUX3 determine which of 16 possible A/D inputs are selected. See the A/D Input Select table below. Port select signal is WRP5*.

TABLE 514 A/D CONTROL PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AMUX0 AMUX1 AMUX2 AMUX3 spare spare READ A/D HOLD

DESCRIPTION

Logic 1 enables A/D output read when the A/D output is read Logic 0 allows an A/D conversion when the A/D output is read Logic 1 places the A/D sample and hold device into the hold mode Logic 0 puts it into the sample mode

TABLE 515 A/D INPUT SELECT

SELECTED INPUTHEX AMUX3 AMUX2 AMUX0


Spare Spare RGT MAN TDS OUT LFT MAN TDS OUT Spare RIGHT DRV FDBK LEFT DRV FDBK KVP DMN FDBK FIL FDBK LEAKAGE COMP FDBK Spare Spare +40V V.F. DISP SUPPLY SIGNAL GROUND +24V VF SUPPLY +5V LOGIC SUPPLY 00H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H 08H 09H 0AH 0BH 0CH 0DH 0EH 0FH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

AMUX1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

5-13

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

5-13

Set BackUp Time Write only port with address location 1300 hex. Port select signal is WRP6*. Schematic location; sheet 6, F3. Writing to this port just before an exposure sets the backup time as follows: BackUp Counts = ((MAS  60) 70 + 5) The actual backup time is equal to (BackUp Count  16.67) millisec since the backup timer is clocked at 60Hz.

5-14

OnBoard Control Write only port with address location 1380 hex. Port select signal is WRP7*. Schematic location; sheet 5, 9B. FREQ FDBK0 and FREQ FDBK1 select which frequency feedback the 80C31 frequency counter looks at. See Frequency Feedback Select table below.

TABLE 516 ONBOARD CONTROL PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME 0 UART MUX CNTRL


Not used on CPU 46-264974

DESCRIPTION Logic 1 selects spare data as serial output and input Logic 0 selects Display data as serial output and switch data as serial input Logic 0 advanced power down signal resets processor Logic 1 holds off the reset. Logic 1 resets the display controller

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

PWR DOWN RST HOLDOFF DISP RST spare spare FREQ FDBK 0 FREQ FDBK 1 FREQ FDBK 2

TABLE 517 FREQUENCY FEEDBACK SELECT

SELECTED FEEDBACK

HEX 00H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H

FDBK 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

FDBK 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

FDBK 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

mAs from Filament Control PWB Battery Voltage / Charging Current Output 0 from the Programmable Timer Output 1 from the Programmable Timer Output 2 from the Programmable Timer Spare Spare Spare

5-14

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

5-15

Right Speed Command DAC Write only port with address location 1400 hex. Port select signal is WRP8*. Schematic location; sheet 4, D2. The data written to this address is the Right Wheel Speed Command, where: 0 = full forward 127 = zero speed 255 = full reverse

5-16

Left Speed Command DAC Write only port with address location 1401 hex. Port select signal is WRP8*. Schematic location; sheet 4, D2. The data written to this address is the Left Wheel Speed Command, where: 255 = full forward 127 = zero speed 0 = full reverse

5-17

Charge Current DAC Write only port with location 1480 hex. Port select signal is WRP9*. Schematic location; Sheet 4, F2. Data written to this address controls the Charging Current. When the TRICKLE CHARGE bit is set to 0, 0 to 255 gives 0 to 5 Amps of charge current. With TRICKLE CHARGE set to 1, 0 to 255 gives 0 to 0.5 Amps of charge current. This DAC also is used in the DRIVE mode to check the integrity of the Handle Circuitry. 255 enables handle transducer signal. 0 forces the handle signal to 0.6V (diode drop).

5-18

Leakage Current Compensation DAC Write only port with address location 1481 hex. Port select signal is WRP9*. Schematic location; sheet 4, F2. Data written to this address is the Leakage Current Compensation.

5-19

Programmable Timer Writing to the following addresses controls the timer as listed below. Port select signal is WRP10*. Schematic location; sheet 6, D6. Note that access to this timer occurs only during system initialization. ADDRESS 1500H 1501H 1502H 1503H DESCRIPTION

Writes data to counter 0 Writes data to counter 1 Writes data to counter 2 Writes data to the Control Word Register

5-15

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

5-20

Filament Current Demand DAC Write only port with the following address locations; 1580H low nibble, 1581 medium nibble, 1582H high nibble, 1583H control (load command) nibble. Port select signal is WRP11*. Schematic location; sheet 4, B2. Data written to this address is the Filament Current Demand. 0H = filament current of approximately 4.5A and 4096H = filament current of approximately 5.5A

5-21

KVP Demand DAC Write only port with the following address locations; 1584H low nibble, 1585H middle nibble, 1586H high nibble, 1587H control (load command) nibble. Port select signal is WRP11*. Schematic location; sheet 4, B2. Data written to this address is the kVp Demand. 0H = 0kVp and 4095H = 145kVp

5-22

Watchdog Timer Write only port with address location 1600 hex. Port select signal is WRP12*. Schematic location; sheet 2, E2. Writing to this port retriggers the watchdog timer. Data is irrelevant. This port must be written to once every 30ms or the watchdog will timeout.

5-23

Variables Unique To PROMS 46302688G1/46302687G1 and 46303272G1/46303273G1 52DH52EH 544H 546H 547H 548H549H Monitor_zero_cap_millivolts Recycle time No_trickle_counter Trickle_lmt No_tricklecounter_mem Corresponds to 0% on bar graph Time between charge cycles # of times since last full charge # of cutoff cycles before full charge total # of charge cycles

5-16

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

ATTENTION

Sections 5-24, 5-25, 5-26 and 5-27 cover AMX-4 Units with: Proms 46-303815G1/46-303816G1 and later, and CPU Board 46-264974.

5-24

kVp/mAs Display After Exposure Note: This function interacts with Section 5 26 function below since they share the same address location. Only one of these functions can be used at a time. If the customer would want to inhibit the feature that stops the kVp/mAs display from flashing after exposure, then do as follows: Load Location C98 hex with 79H Load Location C99 hex with 63H To place the system back to normal, load these locations with something other than 7963H (e.g., 0000H).

5-25

Critical Status Read only port internal to the 8031. Use address FFFF to read this port. Bit 0 Prep switch Bit 1 Exp Switch Bit 2 Tube Pressure Switch Bit 3 60Hz OK Bit 4 Rotor Bit 5 1 kHz RDY Bit 6 Fil Shorted

5-26

Force the Use of 137 kV in Tapcal Note: Note: This is for reference only. This would not normally be done. This function interacts with Section 5 24 function above since they share the same address location. Only one of these functions can be used at a time. The new code allows Tapcal below 137 kV at low battery voltages. Loading these locations will force the use of 137 kV as in previous code. Load location C98 hex with 8AH Load location C99 hex with 74H To place the system back to normal, load these locations with something other than 8A74H (e.g., 0000H).

5-27

Force an Extended Charge Cycle Loading this location will force an extended charge cycle. (Refer to Section 1313.) Load location CA5 hex with 15H This extended charge cycle is transparent to the user. 5-17

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 SECTION 6 DATA LOG


ILLUSTRATION 61 DATA LOG

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

6-1

Introduction To enter the Diagnostics Program, refer to Section 2 Entering Diagnostics. Data Log maintains a history of AMX4 operation. As shown on Illustration 61 there are three Data Log functions: VIEW DATA LOG INIT DATA LOG LOAD DATA LOG

6-2

Enter Data Log Illustration 61 shows Data Log selection using the kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B switches. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. Exit Data Log by pressing mAs Y at any of the three Data Log function prompts listed above. The prompt changes to DATA LOG, indicating that Data Log is closed and another selection may be made from the Diagnostics Menu.

ILLUSTRATION 62 DATA LOG DISPLAY HEX VALUE kVp mAs kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

MESSAGE DISPLAY Prompts Increase Value kVp UP Decrease Value kVp DOWN

Refer to Illustration 62. Data Log items appear on the Message Display directly above the kVp and mAs switches. Values appearing on the kVp and mAs display are a Hexadecimal equivalent of the Decimal number. Numbers are valid only if Data Log has been initialized. Following is a sequential listing of Data Log items:

6-1

mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN Enter Value or Shift Data Entry

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

For Proms 46302688G1/46302687G1 or 46303272G1/46303273G1: D D D D D D D D D D D D MON MODE TIMER software monitor on time in minutes. DRIVE MODE TIMER drive time in minutes. CHARGE MODE TIMER charging time in hours. X-RAY MODE TIMER prep and expose time in seconds. TTL ON-TIME TMR total on time in hours. NUM EQALIZ CYCLE number of complete equalization cycles. (Appears but is not used.) NUM CHARGE CYCLE number of complete charge cycles. TOTL AMP HR CHRG amount of charge returned to batteries. AHR SINCE EQALIZ amount of charge returned to battery since last complete equalization cycle. (Appears but is not used.) EXPOSURE COUNTER - number of exposures. ENERGY METER - applied energy in Joules. EXP TIME METER exposure on time in milliseconds.

6-2

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 For Proms 46303815G1/46303816G1 and later: D D D D D D D D D D D D 6-2-1 Enter View Data Log Display Data Log Items and there values. kVp Y kVp Y kVp B kVp B VIEW DATA LOG mAs B MON MODE TIMER

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

MON MODE TIMER software monitor on time in hours. DRIVE MODE TIMER drive time in minutes. CHARGE MODE TIMER charging time in hours. X-RAY MODE TIMER prep and expose time in seconds. TTL ON-TIME TMR total on time in hours. HIGH CHG TIMER - high charge time in hours. NUM CHARGE CYCLE number of complete charge cycles. TOTL AMP HR CHRG amount of charge returned to batteries. NUM CHG INIT number charge cycles initiated. EXPOSURE COUNTER - number of exposures. ENERGY METER - applied energy in Joules. EXP TIME METER exposure on time in milliseconds.

mAs YEXITING------VIEW DATA LOGindicating that the data log viewing is closed and another selection may be made from the data log menu.

6-3

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 6-2-2 Enter Initialize Data Log

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Set all data log elements to zero. Initializing the Data Log at installation, just before turning the unit over, provides a clean buffer from which operating parameters can be followed. INT DATA LOG. kVp Y mAs B The prompt goes blank, then changes to INT DATA LOG, indicating that Initialize Data Log is closed and another selection may be made from the Data Log menu. 6-3 Load Data Log Set the value of a data log element. This is necessary if the XRay Tube or batteries are replaced. (If the Xray tube is replaced, load zeros in the exposure counter and there is no need to initialize the Data Log). kVp Y kVp Y mAs B kVp YkVp B mAs BkVp YkVp B The number of digits varies from one item to the next. Repeat this process until the value has been entered. mAs YEXITING------LOAD DATA LOG kVp B kVp B LOAD DATA LOG mAs B MON MODE TIMER kVp B INT DATA LOG

6-4

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 SECTION 7 ERROR LOG


ILLUSTRATION 71 ERROR LOG

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

DIAGNOSTICS PROGRAM kVp B PREVIOUS kVp Y NEXT mAs B ENTER END SERVC MODE DIAGNOSIS ITEMS PASSWORD REQUIRED

kVp B PREVIOUS

kVp Y NEXT

mAs B ENTER SYS DIAGNOSTICS DATA LOG ERROR LOG CHARGER

ERROR LIST

HISTOGRAMS

7-1

Introduction To enter the Diagnostics Program, refer to Section 2 Entering Diagnostics. Error Log maintains an error occurrence history which can be helpful when diagnosing problems. Calibration errors, and errors encountered when entering Diagnostics are not recorded. As shown on Illustration 71 there are two Error Log functions: 1. 2. ERROR LIST HISTOGRAMS the order in which errors occurred. the number of times an error occurred.

Both the Error List and Histograms can be initialized, setting all data to zero, to establish a starting point from which errors can be monitored. Initializing the Error List empties the error buffer. This provides a starting point from which errors may be tracked. Initializing the error list at installation, just before turning the unit over, provides a clean buffer from which operating errors can be followed.

7-1

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 72 ERROR LOG DISPLAY

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

ERROR CODE HEXADECIMAL

00 kVp

000
mAs

NUMBER OF OCCURRENCES DECIMAL kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

MESSAGE DISPLAY Prompts

Display Next kVp UP Error Display kVp Previous DOWN Error

7-2

Entering Error Log Illustration 72 shows Error Log selection using the kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B switches. The prompt ERROR LIST displays when you are in Error Log. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. Exit Error Log by pressing mAs Y at either of the Error Log function prompts. The prompt changes to ERROR LOG, indicating that Error Log is closed and another se lection may be made from the Diagnostics Menu. Error log prompts appear on the Message Display directly above the kVp and mAs switches. Error Codes and the number of times they occurred appear on the kVp and mAs Display. Errors display as Hexadecimal numbers, while the occurrence is a decimal number.

7-2

mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN Enter

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 73 ERROR LIST ERROR LOG

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

mAs B ENTER

kVp Y ERROR LIST TOGGLE HISTOGRAMS

kVp Y TOGGLE VIEW ERROR LIST INIT ERROR LIST VIEW HISTOGRAMS INIT HISTOGRAMS

7-2-1

View Error List Error List tells you the order in which errors have occurred. It has room for 256 errors. The first error to display when viewing the error list is the first error which occurred. This is the oldest error listed. The most recent error is at the end of the list. Each time an error occurs it is logged at the end of the error list. If an error occurs 20 times in secession, its code will occupy 20 consecutive spaces. This appears as if there is no response to stepping up or down through the list. You must count the number of steps to determine the number of occurrences. Illustration 73 shows Error List selection using the kVp Y and mAs B switches. Use the following procedure to view the Error List: 1. Press kVp Y until the ERROR LIST prompt appears.

2. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to VIEW ERROR LIST. 3. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to START OF LIST. Press kVp B, and the earliest error code number appears on the kVp and mAs display. If the list is empty the prompt LIST IS EMPTY displays followed by VIEW ERROR LIST. 4. Pressing and holding kVp Y or kVp B scrolls to end or start of list. 5. Pressing kVp Y displays the next error. The prompt END OF LIST displays momentarily when the end of the list is reached. 6. Pressing kVp B displays the previous error. 7. Press mAs Y. The display changes to EXITING------, then to VIEW ER ROR LIST indicating that the error list viewing is closed. 8. Pressing mAs Y. The display changes to ERROR LIST indicating that the Error List is closed.

7-3

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 7-2-2 Initialize Error List

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Initializing the Error List empties the error buffer. This provides a starting point from which errors may be tracked. Initializing the error list at installation, just before turning the unit over, provides a clean buffer from which operating errors can be followed. Illustration 73 shows Error List selection using the kVp Y and mAs B switches. Use the following procedure to initialize the Error List: 1. Press kVp Y until the ERROR LIST prompt appears.

2. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to VIEW ERROR LIST. 3. Press kVp Y. The prompt changes to INIT ERROR LIST. 4. Press mAs B. The prompt goes blank, then INIT ERROR LIST redisplays, indi cating that the error list has been initialized. 5. Press mAs Y. The display changes to ERROR LIST. 6. Press mAs Y. The display changes to ERROR LOG indicating that the Error List is closed.

7-4

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 74 HISTOGRAM ERROR LOG

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

kVp Y ERROR LIST TOGGLE HISTOGRAMS

mAs B ENTER

kVp Y TOGGLE VIEW ERROR LIST INIT ERROR LIST VIEW HISTOGRAMS INIT HISTOGRAMS

7-3

View Histograms Histogram tells you the number of times an error occurred. It is arranged in error code order. Each time an error occurs it is logged in the Histogram. If an error has not occurred, the error code will not display. Histogram displays the hexadecimal error code number above kVp and the number of occurrences as a decimal number above mAs. Illustration 74 shows Histogram selection using the kVp Y and mAs B switches. Use the following procedure to view the Error List: 1. Press kVp Y until the HISTOGRAMS prompt appears.

2. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to VIEW HISTOGRAMS. 3. Press mAs B. 00 000 appears on the kVp and mAs display. 4. Pressing kVp Y displays the next error. If the list is empty the prompt HISTO LIST EMPTY displays followed by VIEW HISTOGRAMS. 5. Pressing kVp B displays the previous error. 6. Press mAs Y. The display changes to EXITING------, then to VIEW HIS TOGRAMS indicating that Histogram viewing is closed. 7. Pressing mAs Y. The display changes to HISTOGRAMS indicating that the Histograms is closed.

7-5

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 7-4 Initialize Histograms

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Initializing Histograms empties its buffer. This provides a starting point from which you may track errors. Initializing Histograms at installation, just before turning the unit over, provides a clean buffer from which operating errors can be followed. Illustration 74 shows Histogram selection using the kVp Y and mAs B switches. Use the following procedure to initialize the Error List: 1. Press kVp Y until the HISTOGRAMS prompt appears.

2. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to VIEW HISTOGRAMS. 3. Press kVp Y. The prompt changes to INIT HISTOGRAMS. 4. Press mAs B. The prompt goes blank, then INIT HISTOGRAMS redisplays, indicating that the Histogram list has been initialized. 5. Press mAs Y. The display changes to HISTOGRAMS. 6. Press mAs Y. The display changes to ERROR LOG indicating that the Histo grams is closed.

7-6

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 7-5 Error List

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Table 71 is a complete cross reference of error code numbers to error names. Refer to Table 121 Power Up Error Codes, and Table 123 Applications Error Codes for the probable cause of the error and recommended service actions. Random RAM patterns appearing to be Error Codes other than those listed in Table 71 occur when the CPU Board or RAM are replaced. Prevent confusion this misinformation causes by initializing Error List and Histograms at installation and whenever the CPU Board or RAM are replaced.
TABLE 71 ERROR CODE TO ERROR NAME CROSS REFERENCE

Error Code

Error Error Name Code (On Operator Display)

Error Name

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 26 2F 30 31 32 33 35 36 37 39 3A 3B 3D 3E

Error 101 Error 102 Error 103 Error 104 Error 105 Error 106 Error 107 Error 210 Error 211 Left Drive Stall Right Drive Stall Error 214 Error 215 Error 216 Error 217 Error 218 RELEASE HANDLE Error 320 Error 321 Error 322 Display Error 23 Error 326 Error 42F Error 430 Error 431 Error 432 Error 433 Error 435 Error 436 Error 437 Error 439 Error 43A Error 43B Error 43D Error 43E (displayed after 100 occurrences)

43 44 45 50 53 54 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 65 66 67 68 69 70 81 82 83 84 85 86 87

Error 443 Battery Too High Battery Too Low Error 450 Error 453 Error 454 Error 456 Error 457 Error 458 Error 459 Error 45A Error 45B Error 45C Error 45D Error 45E Error 45F Error 460 Error 461 Error 462 Error 463 Error 465(displayed after 100 occurrences) Error 466 Error 467 Error 468 Error 469 Halting Error 70 Test - 01 Failed Test - 02 Failed Test - 03 Failed Test - 04 Failed Test - 05 Failed Test - 06 Failed Test - 07 Failed

7-7

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

7-8

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 SECTION 8 CHARGER


ILLUSTRATION 81 CHARGER

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

DIAGNOSTICS PROGRAM kVp B PREVIOUS kVp Y NEXT mAs B ENTER END SERVC MODE DIAGNOSIS ITEMS PASSWORD REQUIRED mAs B ENTER SYS DIAGNOSTICS DATA LOG ERROR LOG CHARGE BATTERYS

kVp B PREVIOUS

kVp Y NEXT

8-1

Introduction To enter the Diagnostics Program, refer to Section 2 Entering Diagnostics. Charger provides a means by which the batteries may be charged when the AMX is not completely calibrated. The Voltmeter and Charger MUST be calibrated before this procedure is used. Other calibration procedures may be delayed until batteries are charged. Charging by this method is identical to charging in the Applications Mode.

CAUTION

Battery damage may occur if Charger is used when the Voltmeter and Charger are not properly calibrated

8-1

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 8-2 Entering Charger

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Illustration 82 shows Charger selection using the kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B switches. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. The prompt PLUG IN CHARGER displays when you are in Charger. Exit Charger at the prompt PLUG IN CHARGER by turning the key switch off.
ILLUSTRATION 82 CHARGE BATTERIES

MESSAGE DISPLAY Prompts

kVp UP

kVp DOWN

1. Press kVp Y

until the CHARGE BATTERYS prompt appears.

2. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to PLUG IN CHARGER. 3. Plug the charging cord into a convenience outlet. The prompt changes to SWITCH TO RUN. 4. Set the Service Switch to the Run position. The prompt changes to CHARGING. Turn the key switch to the OFF position. 5. Unplug charger when CHARGE COMPLETE prompt displays. The CHARGING prompt appears on the Message Display and the % of charge display is lit and functioning. This method of charging is identical to charging in the Applications Mode, however, the bargraph will not update in this mode. It is recommended the voltmeter be recalibrated after charging to reset the bargraph to the actual voltage.

8-2

mAs UP mAs DOWN Enter

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 9 DATA BASE ACCESS ENTERING IMPROPER DATA CAN SUBJECT THE PATIENT AND OP ERATOR TO EXCESSIVE RADIATION OR IT CAN DAMAGE THE XRAY TUBE. IT MAY CAUSE UNEXPECTED DRIVE RESPONSE WHICH CAN INJURE THE OPERATOR AND OTHERS. KNOW WHAT RESULTS TO EXPECT BEFORE CHANGING DATA VALUES. TEST YOUR CHANGES TO MAKE SURE THEY ARE CORRECT.

WARNING

9-1

Introduction Data Base Access provides direct access to the calibration and configuration data base. Data may be checked to see that it is within specified values, and it may be altered to optimize operation. Always record the address and data before making changes so you can return to where you started. Always test your changes to make sure they are correct. Be very careful when altering data. It is possible to enter data that will make the AMX4 operate improperly, causing damage to the unit, injuring a patient, or when attempting to drive the unit, injuring the operator and pedestrians.

ILLUSTRATION 91 SERVICE SWITCH LOCATION KEY SWITCH

9-2

Entering Data Base Access Before using Data Base Access you must start the Service Program, not the Diagnostics Program. To start the service program, perform the following steps: 1. Set the service switch shown on Illustration 9-1 down to the service position. 2. Reset the AMX-4 using one of the following methods. D D If power is off, turn the Key Switch to the ON position. If power is on and the top cover is installed, turn the power key OFF for two seconds and then back ON again.

SERVICE SWITCH IN LEFT SIDE

9-1

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 D

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

If power is on and the top cover is removed providing access to the processor board, press the processor reset switch (AMX1 A2 A1 S183 for CPU Board 46264974, or AMX1 A2 A1 S29 for CPU Board 46232828).

When the service program is ready the END SERVC MODE menu selection appears on the Message Display.
ILLUSTRATION 92 DATA BASE MENU SELECTION

SERVICE PROGRAM kVp B PREVIOUS mAs B ENTER END SERVC MODE DATA BASE ACCESS CALIBRATE SYSTEM kVp Y NEXT

After END SERVC MODE appears on the display, you must reach the DATA BASE AC CESS menu selection. Illustration 92 shows Data Base Access selection using the kVp Y, kVp B, and mAs B switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select DATA BASE ACCESS. 1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B until the DATA BASE ACCESS menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to ENTER PASSWORD-- indicating that Data Base Access may be entered. 9-2-1 Entering Password Enter password. If password is not available, contact Service Engineering. After the password is entered, a hexadecimal address and data value appear on the kVp and mAs display. When an invalid password is entered, the display changes to INVALID ENTRY followed by PLEAS TRY AGAIN, then to DATA BASE ACCESS. Press mAs Bto reenter Data Base Access. If the password is not available, press mAs Y until the prompt INVALID ENTRY appears. The processor halts after three invalid entry attempts. Reset the processor by turning the power off.

9-2

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

9-2-2

Exit Without Changes To exit DATA BASE ACCESS press mAs Y when one of the menu selections shown on Illustration 92 displays. The prompt changes to EXITING------ then to DATA BASE ACCESS indicating that DATA BASE ACCESS is not active. To return to the applications program, perform the following steps: 1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B until the END SERVICE MODE menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to SWITCH TO RUN. 3. Set the service switch up to the run position. The prompt changes to CYCLE KEY SWITCH. Turn the power key OFF for 2 seconds, then back ON again. 4. Check all functions you worked on to make sure they operate correctly.

ILLUSTRATION 93 DATA BASE DISPLAY Address kVp Data mAs kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

MESSAGE DISPLAY Prompts And Errors mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN Enter Value Or Shift Data Entry

Increase Value

kVp UP

Decrease Value

kVp DOWN

9-3

Data Base Display After entering Data Base Access, a hexadecimal address and data value displays on the kVp and mAs display as shown on Illustration 93. Data values display as either a two digit or a four digit hexadecimal number. Data Base address locations are sequential hexadecimal numbers. Section 10 Data Base for AMX4 Units with: PROMS 46302688G1/46302687G1 or 46303272G1/46303273G1 and CPU Boards 46232828 or 46264974, or Section 11 Data Base for AMX4 Units with: PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1, 46316685G1/46316686G1, or 46329187G1/ 46329188G1 or 46329187G2/ 46329188G2 and CPU Board 46264974 contain a complete data base listing.

9-3

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

9-4

Selecting Data Base Address See Illustration 93. Pressing kVp Y increases the address location and pressing kVp B decreases the address location. You may scroll the address by pressing and holding the switch, or change one location at a time by pressing and releasing the switch. When you reach the address location of the data you wish to change, press mAs B. The address display turns off leaving only data on the kVp and mAs display. To exit the address location without changing data, press mAs Y.

9-5

Changing Data Base Values Data is changed starting with the left, or most significant, hexadecimal character and moving right to the least significant character. Change data by using kVp Y and kVp B to select the proper hexadecimal value, then press mAs B to enter the value and move to the next character. (On units with Proms 46303815G1/46303816G1 and later on Board CPU 46264974, the selected digit will flash.) Data displayed on the mAs and kVp display is entered into the data base either when mAs Y is pressed to exit the address, or when mAs B is pressed to enter the last value. The address and new data appears on the kVp and mAs display after entering data.

9-6

Check Sum and Limit Errors You can always read Data Base Access. However, you can write only to areas containing a valid check sum. The area where the check sum error occurred must be recalibrated before access is allowed. Why? A new check sum must be calculated every time data changes. If you change the wrong value you could damage the AMX4, or leave it in a noncompliant condition. A Limit Error occurs when a value is entered that is above or below preset limits. A limit error prompt occurs after out of range data is entered. What happens? The data you entered is compared with its upper and lower limits. If it is outside of the limit, the original value is placed in the data base instead of the value you entered.

9-7

Demonstration Procedure During this demonstration you will learn to operate Data Base Access. You will also see the relationship between Calibration and Configuration Data Base. First, you will enter out of range data to see the response to a limit error. Then you will use Data Base Access to change data and test the change. Finally, you will change data using Calibration, test the change and verify the change using Data Base Access. Lets look at an example of Data Base Access. Field light on time is used for this demonstration because it presents the fewest problems if things go wrong. If a problem should arise as you try this example, simply enter calibration and reset the field light on time.

9-4

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 94 HEXADECIMAL REPRESENTATION

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

9-7-1

Enter Data Base Access 1. Place the service switch in the service position (down) and turn the power on. After completing power up diagnostics, the display changes to END SERVC MODE. 2. Press kVp Y to display the prompt DATA BASE ACCESS, then press mAs B. The prompt changes to ENTER PASSWORD--. 3. Enter the password. An address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display. Press kVp Y, then kVp B to see how the address changes. Pressing and holding the button scrolls the display. Notice the difference between hexadecimal B and 6 as shown on Illustration 9-4. It is easy to mistake a B for a 6.

ILLUSTRATION 95 FIELD LIGHT ONTIME DISPLAY

1BB
kVp

2E mAs

kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

MESSAGE DISPLAY Prompts and Errors

kVp UP

Decrease Value

kVp DOWN

9-5

Increase Value

mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN Enter Value or Shift Data Entry

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

9-7-2

Change Field Light OnTime Change the Field Light OnTime to more than 45 seconds. Because one bit equals one second, this location must be set to 2E Hex or higher to exceed the maximum value. Refer to Table 91, Field Light OnTime Values. Entering the specified data in a location other than address 1BB could dam age the AMX-4. Make sure the address is correct before entering data. 1. Select the Field Light On-Time address 1BB shown on Illustration 9-5. This address is very near the end of the data base. Press kVp B to scroll from the top of the data base to the bottom. Press mAs B when address 1BB displays. The address disappears from the kVp and mAs display, leaving the two data charac ters. Record this Hex value in the margin so you can return to this setting later. 2. Press kVp Y, then kVp B change this character to 2. to see how the first data character changes, then

CAUTION

Notice that characters will not scroll, they change when the switch is released. 3. Press mAs B setting the first character to 2 and allowing the second character to be changed. Press kVp Y, then kVp B to see how the second data character changes, then change this character to E. 4. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to FLDLT BYT LIMIT. Press mAs Y. The prompt changes to OLD VALUE RESTRD. What happened? The value you entered was higher than the maximum value, so the program returned (restored) the original value to the data base. 5. Enter the hex value 2D in address location 1BB. This corresponds to a lamp ontime of 45 seconds. 9-7-3 Test Change By going to the application program you will see the changes introduced by entering your data. 1. Exit the Service Program by pressing kVp Y or kVp B until the prompt END SERVC MODE appears. 2. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to SWITCH TO RUN. 3. Set the Service Switch to the run position. The prompt changes to CYCLE KEY SWITCH. 4. Turn the Power Key Switch off, then back on. Power-up test is performed. 5. Press the collimator light button. The collimator light will stay on for 45 seconds. Accurate timing is not important for this demonstration.

9-6

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

9-7-4

Enter Calibration Enter calibration and check the Field Light OnTime to check the value. 1. Turn the Power Key Switch to OFF. Set the Service Switch to the service posi tion. Turn the Power Key Switch to the ON position. 2. Press kVp Y to display the prompt CALIBRATE SYSTEM, then press mAs B. The prompt changes to CAL DRIVE HANDLE. 3. Press kVp B until the prompt CAL FLD LT TIME appears, then press mAs B. The prompt changes to ENTER VALUE indicating that Field Light On-Time has been entered. The Field Light On-Time of 045.00 appears on the kVp and mAs Display.

9-7-5

Change Field Light OnTime Now, while still in the calibration mode, change the Field Light OnTime to 15 seconds. This is represented by 0F Hex in the data base. 1. Select 15 second on-time by holding the switch down to scroll the values. D D Pressing kVp Y Pressing kVp B increases ontime in 0.1 second increments. decreases ontime in 0.1 second increments.

2. Press mAs B when 15 appears. The prompt changes to CAL FLD LT TIME. 3. Press mAs Y. The prompt changes to CALIBRATE SYSTEM. The display shows tenths of a second, but only seconds are saved. If a value greater than 45 seconds or less than 5 seconds is entered, the error FLDLT BYTE LIMT displays until mAs Y is pressed, then FLDLIT TIME LIMT is displayed. The Field Light OnTime is set to the limit that was exceeded. Press mAs Y again to exit. 9-7-6 Test Change Again By going to the application program you will see that the collimator light will stay on for 15 seconds. 1. Press kVp B until the prompt END SERVC MODE displays.

2. Press mAs B. The prompt changes to SWITCH TO RUN. 3. Set the Service Switch up to the application position. The prompt changes to CYCLE KEY SWITCH. 4. Turn the Power Key Switch off, then back on. Power-up test is performed. 5. Press the collimator light button. The collimator light will stay on for 15 seconds. Accurate timing is not important for this demonstration.

9-7

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

9-7-7

Enter Data Base Access Enter Data Base Access to verify the 15 second change. The address 1BB and data 0F appear on the kVp and mAs display indicating that the Field Light on Time is set to 15 seconds.

TABLE 91 FIELD LIGHT ONTIME VALUES ONTIME 5 10 15 HEX VALUE 05 0A 0F ONTIME 20 25 30 HEX VALUE 14 19 1E ONTIME 35 40 45 HEX VALUE 23 28 2D

9-7-8

On Your Own You have used Data Base Access to change a calibration value. Then you tested the change and you saw the result of entering out of range data. Table 91 contains some Field Light OnTimes in seconds and the Data Base hexadecimal values. Enter some of these values to see that valid data is accepted. Test your changes to see that values from 5 seconds, 05 Hex, to 45 seconds, 2D Hex, are accepted. You may enter a value that is less than 5 seconds to see that it produces the same results that too long a time produced. By now you can see that as long as the Data Base Value is within its minimum and maximum range, the program will accept it. You have seen that you can do no damage with Field Light OnTime. With other parts of the data base this is not the case. Improper values can destroy the batteries or XRay Tube and most every thing in between. Dont be afraid of using Data Base Access. But when you use it, use it carefully.

9-7-9

Return The Original Value Enter the original hexadecimal value that you wrote in the margin in Section 9-7-2, Change Field Light OnTime. Test the unit to make sure it is operating properly before leaving.

9-8

Floor Scuffing Some units leave marks on the floor when accelerating. Reducing the Acceleration Factor reduces this problem. Refer to Acceleration Factor (address 01 6A) in Table 106, Drive Parameters, or Table 115, Drive Parameters (whichever is appropriate for PROMS in this unit), and experiment with the value until the scuffing is reduced. After the data change, be sure to recalibrate the drive handle.

9-8

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 10 DATA BASE FOR AMX4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46302688G1/46302687G1 OR 46303272G1/46303273G1 AND CPU BOARDS 46232828 OR 46264974 10-1 Calibratible XRay Parameters This section contains a complete listing of the AMX4 Data Base.
TABLE 101 CALIBRATIBLE XRAY PARAMETERS

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

XRAY BYTES
Counts Per mAs00 00 This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The 99 C8 64

number of VCO pulses required for 1.0 mAs of Xray emission.


Battery Recovery Time 00 01 14 1E 0A

Time in seconds that the WAIT message will be displayed after an exposure. This is the time it takes the batteries to recover after an exposure so that technique accuracy can be guaranteed.
Max Prep to Exposure Time 00 02 1E 28 0A

The maximum time in seconds that the unit can remain in prep before an exit is forced.
Initial Heat Wait Time 00 03 5A 78 3C

The maximum heat wait time in seconds required after an exposure.


Max Filament Current Change 00 04 0A 10 00

The maximum number of DAC counts the Automatic Calibration Filament Current Table Elements can change after most exposures. Used only during auto calibration.
Leakage Current at 50 kVp 00 05 00 64 00

The number of leakage current DAC counts required at 50kVp to give proper leakage compensation.

10-1

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 101 (CONT.) CALIBRATIBLE XRAY PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Leakage Current at 80 kVp

00 06

0A

C8

00

The number of leakage current DAC counts required at 80kVp to give proper leakage compensation.
Leakage Current at 125 kVp 00 07 21 FA 0A

The number of leakage current DAC counts required at 125kVp to give proper leakage compensation.
Last Calibratible Tap 00 08 12 1B 10

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The index of the last tap combination that could be calibrated during Tap Cal.
Filament Current Calibrated 00 09 FF FF 00

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Hex value 01 indicates the filament current tables have been calibrated, any other value is false.
kVp Calibrated 00 0A FF FF 00

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Hex value 01 indicates the kVp has been calibrated, any other value is false. Xray Bytes not used: 00B, 00C, 00D, 00E. XRAY WORDS
Turn off Delay at 50 kVp 00 0F 03 E8 07 D0 00 FA

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The time in microseconds between the EXP STOP CMND being given and XRAY ON going low at 50kVp. This time is used to determine when to terminate the exposure in order to get the selected mAs.

10-2

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 101 (CONT.) CALIBRATIBLE XRAY PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Turn off Delay at 80 kVp

00 11

03 E8

07 D0

00 FA

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The time in microseconds between the EXP STOP CMND being given and XRAY ON going low at 80kVp. This time is used to determine when to terminate the exposure in order to get the selected mAs.
Turn off Delay at 125 kVp 00 13 03 E8 07 D0 00 FA

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The time in microseconds between the EXP STOP CMND being given and XRAY ON going low at 120kVp. This time is used to determine when to terminate the exposure in order to get the selected mAs.
Ideal kVp1 Output 00 15 04 C9 05 C3 03 CF

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The DAC counts required to get 52 kVp +3 kVp.
Ideal kVp2 Output 00 17 05 F5 06 EF 04 FB

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The DAC counts required to get 64 kVp +3 kVp.
Ideal kVp3 Output 00 19 08 40 09 33 07 3F

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The DAC counts required to get 85 kVp +3 kVp.
Ideal kVp4 Output 00 1B 0C B2 0D AC 0B BB

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The DAC counts required to get 120 kVp +3 kVp.
Actual kVp1 Output 00 1D 02 08 02 3A 01 D6

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Actual kVp multiplied by 10 which resulted from the Ideal kVp1 Output DAC count. This parameter is entered during kVp calibration.

10-3

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 101 (CONT.) CALIBRATIBLE XRAY PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Actual kVp2 Output

00 1F

02 80

02 B2

02 4E

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Actual kVp multiplied by 10 which resulted from the Ideal kVp2 Output DAC count. This parameter is entered during kVp calibration.
Actual kVp3 Output 00 21 03 52 03 84 03 20

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Actual kVp multiplied by 10 which resulted from the Ideal kVp3 Output DAC count. This parameter is entered during kVp calibration.
Actual kVp4 Output 00 23 04 BB 04 E2 04 7E

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Actual kVp multiplied by 10 which resulted from the Ideal kVp4 Output DAC count. This parameter is entered during kVp calibration.
mAs Frequency at 100 mA This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The 00 25 3B 92 4E 20 2710

100mA frequency from the mA VCO. This value is calculated during mAs calibration.

10-4

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

10-2

Auto Cal Filament Current This table is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Table 102 is the first of the two filament lookuptables giving the relationship between filament current DAC counts at emission current of 90 and 110 mA for all valid kVp stations. This table is updated after most exposures to maintain this relationship.

TABLE 102 AUTO CAL FILAMENT CURRENT

kVp at
Address

90 mA
Default Max Min Address

110 mA
Default Max Min

50 kVp 52 kVp 54 kVp 56 kVp 58 kVp 60 kVp 62 kVp 64 kVp 66 kVp 68 kVp 70 kVp 72 kVp 74 kVp 76 kVp 80 kVp 85 kVp 90 kVp 95 kVp 100 kVp 105 kVp 110 kVp 115 kVp 120 kVp 125 kVp

00 27 00 2B 00 2F 00 33 00 37 00 3B 00 3F 00 43 00 47 00 4B 00 4F 00 53 00 57 00 5B 00 5F 00 63 00 67 00 6B 00 6F 00 73 00 77 00 7B 00 7F 00 83

08 09 07 F5 07 E1 07 CD 07 B9 07 A5 07 91 07 7D 07 6D 07 5E 07 4E 07 3E 07 2E 07 1F 06 FF 06 D8 06 B9 06 9A 06 7B 06 5B 06 3C 06 1D 05 FE 05 DF

0F 64 0F 61 0F 37 0F 0C 0E E2 0E D8 0E CC 0E B3 0E 9C 0E 90 0E 83 0E 6D 0E 56 0E 4A 0E 31 0E 0C 0D DD 0D AE 0D 80 0D 51 0D 22 0C F3 0C C5 0C 96

03 0C 02 E1 02 B7 02 8C 02 62 02 4C 02 35 02 15 01 F4 01 DE 01 C7 01 BB 01 AE 01 A2 01 89 01 6E 01 53 01 38 01 1E 01 03 00 DE 00 C7 00 A9 00 7A

00 29 00 2D 00 31 00 35 00 39 00 3D 00 41 00 45 00 49 00 4D 00 51 00 55 00 59 00 5D 00 61 00 65 00 69 00 6D 00 71 00 75 00 79 00 7D 00 81 00 85

0A 18 09 FF 09 E6 09 CD 09 B5 09 9C 09 83 09 6A 09 59 09 48 09 37 09 27 09 16 09 05 08 E3 08 B9 08 8B 08 5D 08 2F 08 01 07 D3 07 A5 07 77 07 49

0F FF 0F FF 0F FE 0F DD 0F BC 0F 9C 0F 7B 0F 64 0F 5A 0F 4A 0F 3E 0F 31 0F 1A 0F 5D 0F 4E 0F 40 0E FD 0F 29 0E D2 0E A6 0E 7B 0E 4F 0E 24 0D F8

04 EC 04 CB 04 AA 04 89 04 68 04 48 04 27 04 06 03 E5 03 C4 03 A4 03 83 03 62 03 41 03 00 02 D4 02 A9 02 7D 02 52 02 26 01 FB 01 CF 01 A4 01 78

10-5

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

10-3

Filament Current Calibration Table This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. This is the second of the two filament lookuptables giving the relationship between filament current DAC counts at emission current of 90 and 110 mA for all valid kVp stations. This table is modified only during filament current table calibration. After calibration it is copied into Table 102 Auto Cal Filament Current Table.

TABLE 103 FILAMENT CURRENT CALIBRATION TABLE

kVp at
Address

90 mA
Default Max Min Address

110 mA
Default Max Min

50 kVp 52 kVp 54 kVp 56 kVp 58 kVp 60 kVp 62 kVp 64 kVp 66 kVp 68 kVp 70 kVp 72 kVp 74 kVp 76 kVp 80 kVp 85 kVp 90 kVp 95 kVp 100 kVp 105 kVp 110 kVp 115 kVp 120 kVp 125 kVp

00 87 00 8B 00 8F 00 93 00 97 00 9B 00 9F 00 A3 00 A7 00 AB 00 AF 00 B3 00 B7 00 BB 00 BF 00 C3 00 C7 00 CB 00 CF 00 D3 00 D7 00 DB 00 DF 00 E3

08 09 07 F5 07 E1 07 CD 07 B9 07 A5 07 91 07 7D 07 6D 07 5E 07 4E 07 3E 07 2E 07 1F 06 FF 06 D8 06 B9 06 9A 06 7B 06 5B 06 3C 06 1D 05 FE 05 DF

0F 64 0F 61 0F 37 0F 0C 0E E2 0E D8 0E CC 0E B3 0E 9C 0E 90 0E 83 0E 6D 0E 56 0E 4A 0E 31 0E 0C 0D DD 0D AE 0D 80 0D 51 0D 22 0C F3 0C C5 0C 96

03 0C 02 E1 02 B7 02 8C 02 62 02 4C 02 35 02 15 01 F4 01 DE 01 C7 01 BB 01 AE 01 A2 01 89 01 6E 01 53 01 38 01 1E 01 03 00 DE 00 C7 00 A9 00 7A

00 89 00 8D 00 91 00 95 00 99 00 9D 00 A1 00 A5 00 A9 00 AD 00 B1 00 B5 00 B9 00 BD 00 C1 00 C5 00 C9 00 CD 00 D1 00 D5 00 D9 00 DD 00 E1 00 E5

0A 18 09 FF 09 E6 09 CD 09 B5 09 9C 09 83 09 6A 09 59 09 48 09 37 09 27 09 16 09 05 08 E3 08 B9 08 8B 08 5D 08 2F 08 01 07 D3 07 A5 07 77 07 49

0F FF 0F FF 0F FE 0F DD 0F BC 0F 9C 0F 7B 0F 64 0F 5A 0F 4A 0F 3E 0F 31 0F 1A 0F 5D 0F 4E 0F 40 0F 29 0E FD 0E D2 0E A6 0E 7B 0E 4F 0E 24 0D F8

04 EC 04 CB 04 AA 04 89 04 68 04 4B 04 27 04 06 03 E5 03 C4 03 A4 03 83 03 62 03 41 03 00 02 D4 02 A9 02 7D 02 52 02 26 01 FB 01 CF 01 A4 01 78

10-6

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

10-4

Turns Ratio Taps This table is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. It is a lookuptable giving the effective turns ratio (battery volts to kVp) of the system for each valid tap combination. It is calculated during tap calibration.

TABLE 104 TURNS RATIO TAPS

Relay Tap Selection

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

No Taps K1 K2 K2, K1 K3 K3, K1 K3, K2 K3, K2, K1 K4 K4, K1 K4, K2 K4, K2, K1 K4, K3 K4, K3, K1 K4, K3, K2, K4, K3, K2, K1 K5 K5, K1 K5, K2 K5, K2, K1 K5, K3 K5, K3, K1 K5, K3, K2 K5, K3, K2, K1 K6, K3 K6, K3, K1 K6, K3, K2 K6, K3, K2, K1

00 E7 00 E9 00 EB 00 ED 00 EF 00 F1 00 F3 00 F5 00 F7 00 F9 00 FB 00 FD 00 FF 01 01 01 03 01 05 01 07 01 09 01 0B 01 0D 01 0F 01 11 01 13 01 15 01 17 01 19 01 1B 01 1D 10-7

02 66 02 34 02 4F 02 7D 02 E6 03 28 03 33 03 62 03 4A 03 7F 03 AC 03 E1 04 25 04 65 04 76 04 C3 05 21 05 17 05 39 05 6A 05 9A 05 EB 06 24 06 8D 06 EA 06 F3 07 23 07 AF

03 B6 03 C4 03 DF 04 0D 04 76 04 B8 04 C3 04 F2 04 DA 05 0F 05 3C 05 71 05 B5 05 91 06 06 06 53 06 B1 06 A7 06 C9 06 FA 07 2A 07 7B 07 B4 08 1D 08 7A 08 83 08 B3 09 3F

00 96 00 A4 00 BF 00 ED 01 56 01 98 01 A3 04 D2 01 BA 01 EF 02 1C 02 51 02 95 02 D5 02 E6 03 33 03 91 03 87 03 A9 03 DA 04 0A 04 5B 04 94 04 FD 05 5A 05 63 05 93 06 1F

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

10-5

System Resistance Taps This table is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A look uptable giving the effective system resistance (battery to xray tube) for each valid tap combination. It is calculated during tap calibration.

TABLE 105 SYSTEM RESISTANCE TAPS

Relay Tap Selection

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

No Taps K1 K2 K2, K1 K3 K3, K1 K3, K2 K3, K2, K1 K4 K4, K1 K4, K2 K4, K2, K1 K4, K3 K4, K3, K1 K4, K3, K2, K4, K3, K2, K1 K5 K5, K1 K5, K2 K5, K2, K1 K5, K3 K5, K3, K1 K5, K3, K2 K5, K3, K2, K1 K6, K3 K6, K3, K1 K6, K3, K2 K6, K3, K2, K1

01 1F 01 21 01 23 01 25 01 27 01 29 01 2B 01 2D 01 2F 01 31 01 33 01 35 01 37 01 39 01 3B 01 3D 01 3F 01 41 01 43 01 45 01 47 01 49 01 4B 01 4D 01 4F 01 51 01 53 01 55 10-8

00 D3 00 E1 00 C7 00 D0 01 37 01 54 01 27 01 34 00 D2 00 EA 00 F9 01 11 01 3A 01 5F 01 51 01 8B 01 AC 01 7C 01 8F 01 A7 01 C1 01 FF 02 23 02 7C 02 B3 02 9C 02 B4 03 37

01 9B 01 A9 01 8F 01 98 01 FF 02 1C 02 53 01 FC 01 9A 01 B2 01 C1 01 D9 02 02 02 27 02 19 02 53 02 74 02 44 02 57 02 6F 02 89 02 C7 02 EB 03 44 03 7B 03 64 03 7C 03 E7

00 6F 00 7D 00 64 00 6C 00 6F 00 8C 00 96 00 9E 00 6E 00 86 00 95 00 AD 00 C2 00 C3 00 C5 00 C7 00 C8 00 D2 00 DB 00 DF 00 F9 01 37 01 5B 01 B4 01 C2 01 C2 01 C2 01 C5

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

10-6

Drive Parameters

TABLE 106 DRIVE PARAMETERS

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

DRIVE BYTES
Drive Threshold01 60 0A 14 00

Drive command deadband in DAC counts around the zero output value.
Drive Equal Value 01 61 0A 14 00

The maximum difference between the left and right drive output commands in DAC counts for which the left and right output commands will be made equal.
Left Output Zero Point 01 62 80 90 70

The DAC count which gives a zero left drive command.


Left Forward Output Gain 01 63 64 C8 32

The left output gain in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1.
Left Reverse Output Gain 01 64 64 C8 32

The left output gain in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1.
Right Output Zero Point 01 65 80 90 70

The DAC count which gives a zero right drive command.


Right Forward output Gain 01 66 64 C8 32

The right output gain in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1.
Right Reverse output Gain 01 67 64 C8 32

The right output gain in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1.

10-9

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 106 (CONT.) DRIVE PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Right Forward Position is Greater

01 68

01

01

00

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Indicates magnet polarity of the Hall Effect Drive Sensor. A 01 Hex indicates that pushing forward on the right drive handle results in a more positive transducer voltage than pulling back produces.
Left Forward Position is Greater 01 69 00 01 00

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Indicates magnet polarity of the Hall Effect Drive Sensor. A 01 Hex indicates that pushing forward on the left drive handle results in a more positive transducer voltage than pulling back produces.
Acceleration Factor 01 6A C8 FF 28

Controls handle sensitivity. The larger this number is the more responsive the unit will be after the drive handle is calibrated.
Left Minimum Input 01 6B 80 CO 10

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The minimum value from the left handle transducer.
Left Maximum Input 01 6C 80 FO 30

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The maximum value from the left handle transducer. DRIVE WORDS
Left Input Zero Point 01 6D 08 00 0C 00 05 00

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The number of A/D counts with no force applied to the drive handle on the left side.
Left Forward Input Gain 01 6F 00 D2 07 D0 00 19

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the left input in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21.

10-10

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 106 (CONT.) DRIVE PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Left Reverse Input Gain

01 71

00 D2

07 D0

00 19

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the left input in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21.
Right Input Zero Point 01 73 08 00 0C 00 05 00

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The number of A/D counts with no force is applied to the drive handle on the right side.
Right Forward Input Gain 01 75 00 D2 07 D0 00 19

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the right input in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21.
Right Reverse Input Gain 01 77 00 D2 07 D0 00 19

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the left input in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21.
Right Minimum Input 01 79 00 80 00 CO 00 10

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The minimum value from the right handle transducer.
Right Maximum Input 01 7B 00 80 00 FO 00 30

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The maximum value from the right handle transducer.

10-11

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

10-7

Charge Parameters

TABLE 107 CHARGE PARAMETERS

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

CHARGE BYTES EQUALIZATION AMP HR Amount of charge returned to battery before an equalization cycle is required. (extended recharge) (not used with PROMS 46302688G1/46302687G1). Maximum High Charge Time The maximum time in hours that the unit can charge. If this time is exceeded, an error condition is flagged and trickle charge is entered. Trickle Charge Clamp Voltage The maximum long term voltage allowed during trickle charge. High Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during charger calibration. High Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during charger calibration. Trickle Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during trickle charge calibration. Trickle Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during trickle charge calibration. 01 7D AF C8 32

01 7E

OF

14

0A

01 7F

7C

80

75

01 80

32

3C

28

01 81

19

23

0F

01 82

C8

E1

AF

01 83

64

7D

4B

10-12

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 107 (CONT.) CHARGE PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Start Timed Charge Counts The DAC count at which the final charge phase begins.

01 84

1A* 24**

34* 34**

10* 10**

High Charge Clamp Volts The maximum battery voltage in volts allowed during charging. Charging current will decrease in order to clamp the voltage.

01 85

82

85

7D

* VALUE FOR PROM 46302688G1/46302687G1 ** VALUE FOR PROM 46303272G1/46303273G1

10-13

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 107 (CONT.) CHARGE PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

EQUALIZATION CLAMP VOLTS The maximum battery voltage in volts allowed during the charging equalization cycle. (not used). EQUALIZATION TIME The time to equalization complete when the switch to the trickle charge rate occurs. (not used). FINAL PHASE TIME The time to Charge Completed from the time the switch to the trickle charge rate occurs.

01 86

84

8C

80

01 87

12

40

06

01 88

06* 06**

0C* 12**

00* 00**

* VALUE FOR PROM 46302688G1/46302687G1 ** VALUE FOR PROM 46303272G1/46303273G1

10-14

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 107 (CONT.) CHARGE PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

CHARGE WORDS Feedback at High Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to High Charge High Output counts. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output. Feedback at High Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to High Charge Low Output counts. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output. mA at High Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charging current in milliamps with the charge current demand DAC set to High Charge High Output counts. This parameter is calculated during charger calibration. It is used to determine what the charging current is for any given charge current demand DAC output. mA at High Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charging current in milliamps with the charge current demand DAC set to High Charge Low Output counts. This parameter is calculated during charger calibration. It is used to determine what the charging current is for any given charge current demand DAC output. 01 89 09 C4 13 88 04 B0

01 8B

04 4C

05 DC

02 58

01 8D

03 E8

04 E2

02 EE

01 8F

01 F4

02 EE

00 FA

10-15

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 107 (CONT.) CHARGE PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Feedback at Trickle Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to Trickle Charge High Output counts in the trickle charge mode. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output in the trickle charge mode. Feedback at Trickle Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to Trickle Charge Low Output counts in the trickle charge mode. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output in the trickle charge mode. Maximum Charging mA The maximum allowable charging current in milliamps. Charge Current Feedback Error The error window on the expected charge current feedback in VCO pulse counts.

01 91

27 10

61 A8

13 88

01 93

13 88

3A 98

03 E8

01 97

09 C4

0B B8

07 D0

01 99

02 EE

03 E8

01 F4

10-16

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

10-8

Battery Parameters

TABLE 108 BATTERY PARAMETERS

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

BATTERY WORDS Not used Zero Capacity Change Maximum change for battery aging. (Use 0000 to disable battery aging) Monitor Full Capacity millivolts Battery voltage which corresponds to 100% capacity times 100. i.e. default of 2D 50 Hex is, decimal 11600 100 = 116.00 V. Battery Volts Calibration Count This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The number of VCO pulse counts obtained in a five second period during battery voltage meter calibration. Battery Calibration Millivolts This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The voltage in volts times 100 at the time that Battery Volts Calibration Counts was obtained. i.e. default of 2BCA Hex is, decimal 11210 100 = 112.10 V. 01 9B 01 9D 19 19 FF FF 00 00

01 9F

2D 50* 2C 88**

2E 18* 2E 18**

2C EC* 2C 24**

01 A1

8A CC

EA 60

4E 20

01 A3

2B CA

3A 98

1F 40

* VALUE FOR PROM 46302688G1/46302687G1 ** VALUE FOR PROM 46303272G1/46303273G1

10-17

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

10-9

Field Light Parameters

TABLE 109 FIELD LIGHT PARAMETERS

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

FIELD LIGHT BYTES Field Light on Time The time in seconds that the field light will be on after the field light switch is released. Maximum Field Light on Time The maximum continuous field light operating time in seconds. Once this time has been exceeded the field light is turned off and will be disabled until Field Light Cool Time seconds have expired. Field Light Cool Time The cool (off) time in seconds required once the field light has been on for more than Maximum Field Light On Time. Minimum no Cool Time The time in seconds for which the field light will be disabled if an operator attempts to light the field light. This occurs only when field light heat capacity is approaching maximum limit. 01 A7 1E 2D 05

01 A8

C8

FF

64

01 A9

FF

FF

64

01 AA

08

0F

04

10-18

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 11 DATA BASE FOR AMX4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1, 46316685G1/46316686G1, OR 46329187G1/ 46329188G1, OR 46329187G2/ 46329188G2 AND CPU BOARD 46264974 11-1 Calibratible XRay Parameters This section contains a complete listing of the AMX4 Data Base.
TABLE 111 CALIBRATIBLE XRAY PARAMETERS

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

XRAY BYTES
Counts Per mAs00 00 This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The 99 C8 64

number of VCO pulses required for 1.0 mAs of Xray emission.


Battery Recovery Time 00 01 14 1E 0A

Time in seconds that the WAIT message will be displayed after an exposure. This is the time it takes the batteries to recover after an exposure so that technique accuracy can be guaranteed.
Max Prep to Exposure Time 00 02 1E 28 0A

The maximum time in seconds that the unit can remain in prep before an exit is forced.
Initial Heat Wait Time 00 03 5A 78 3C

The maximum heat wait time in seconds required after an exposure.


Max Filament Current Change 00 04 0A 10 00

The maximum number of DAC counts the Automatic Calibration Filament Current Table Elements can change after most exposures. Used only during auto calibration.
Leakage Current at 50 kVp 00 05 00 64 00

The number of leakage current DAC counts required at 50kVp to give proper leakage compensation.
Leakage Current at 80 kVp 00 06 0A C8 00

The number of leakage current DAC counts required at 80kVp to give proper leakage compensation.

11-1

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 111 (CONT.) CALIBRATIBLE XRAY PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Leakage Current at 125 kVp

00 07

21

FA

0A

The number of leakage current DAC counts required at 125kVp to give proper leakage compensation.
Last Calibratible Tap 00 08 12 1B 10

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The index of the last tap combination that could be calibrated during Tap Cal.
Filament Current Calibrated 00 09 FF FF 00

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Hex value 01 indicates filament current tables have been calibrated. Any other value is false.
kVp Calibrated 00 0A FF FF 00

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Hex value 01 indicates the kVp has been calibrated. Any other value is false.
Taps Calibrated00 0B 00 FF 00

This value established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Hex value 01 indicates Taps have been calibrated. Any other value is false.

XRAY WORDS
Turn off Delay at 50 kVp 00 0F 03 E8 07 D0 00 FA

This value established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Time in microseconds between EXP STOP CMND being given and XRAY ON going low at 50kVp. This time used to determine when to terminate exposure in order to get selected mAs.
Turn off Delay at 80 kVp 00 11 03 E8 07 D0 00 FA

This value established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Time in microseconds between EXP STOP CMND being given and XRAY ON going low at 80kVp. This time is used to determine when to terminate the exposure in order to get the selected mAs.

11-2

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 111 (CONT.) CALIBRATIBLE XRAY PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Turn off Delay at 125 kVp

00 13

03 E8

07 D0

00 FA

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The time in microseconds between the EXP STOP CMND being given and XRAY ON going low at 120kVp. This time is used to determine when to terminate the exposure in order to get the selected mAs.
Ideal kVp1 Output 00 15 04 C9 05 C3 03 CF

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The DAC counts required to get 52 kVp +3 kVp.
Ideal kVp2 Output 00 17 05 F5 06 EF 04 FB

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The DAC counts required to get 64 kVp +3 kVp.
Ideal kVp3 Output 00 19 08 40 09 33 07 3F

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The DAC counts required to get 85 kVp +3 kVp.
Ideal kVp4 Output 00 1B 0C B2 0D AC 0B BB

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The DAC counts required to get 120 kVp +3 kVp.
Actual kVp1 Output 00 1D 02 08 02 3A 01 D6

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Actual kVp multiplied by 10 which resulted from the Ideal kVp1 Output DAC count. This parameter is entered during kVp calibration.
Actual kVp2 Output 00 1F 02 80 02 B2 02 4E

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Actual kVp multiplied by 10 which resulted from the Ideal kVp2 Output DAC count. This parameter is entered during kVp calibration.

11-3

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 111 (CONT.) CALIBRATIBLE XRAY PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Actual kVp3 Output

00 21

03 52

03 84

03 20

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Actual kVp multiplied by 10 which resulted from the Ideal kVp3 Output DAC count. This parameter is entered during kVp calibration.
Actual kVp4 Output 00 23 04 BB 04 E2 04 7E

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Actual kVp multiplied by 10 which resulted from the Ideal kVp4 Output DAC count. This parameter is entered during kVp calibration.
mAs Frequency at 100 mA This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The 00 25 3B 92 4E 20 27 10

100mA frequency from the mA VCO. This value is calculated during mAs calibration.

Locations 27 through 86 are not used.

11-4

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

11-2

Filament Current Calibration Table This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. This is the second of the two filament lookuptables giving the relationship between filament current DAC counts at emission current of 90 and 110 mA for all valid kVp stations. This table is modified only during filament current table calibration. After calibration it is copied into Table 112 Auto Cal Filament Current Table.

TABLE 112 FILAMENT CURRENT CALIBRATION TABLE

kVp at
Address

90 mA
Default Max Min Address

110 mA
Default Max Min

50 kVp 52 kVp 54 kVp 56 kVp 58 kVp 60 kVp 62 kVp 64 kVp 66 kVp 68 kVp 70 kVp 72 kVp 74 kVp 76 kVp 80 kVp 85 kVp 90 kVp 95 kVp 100 kVp 105 kVp 110 kVp 115 kVp 120 kVp 125 kVp

00 87 00 8B 00 8F 00 93 00 97 00 9B 00 9F 00 A3 00 A7 00 AB 00 AF 00 B3 00 B7 00 BB 00 BF 00 C3 00 C7 00 CB 00 CF 00 D3 00 D7 00 DB 00 DF 00 E3

08 09 07 F5 07 E1 07 CD 07 B9 07 A5 07 91 07 7D 07 6D 07 5E 07 4E 07 3E 07 2E 07 1F 06 FF 06 D8 06 B9 06 9A 06 7B 06 5B 06 3C 06 1D 05 FE 05 DF

0F 64 0F 61 0F 37 0F 0C 0E E2 0E D8 0E CC 0E B3 0E 9C 0E 90 0E 83 0E 6D 0E 56 0E 4A 0E 31 0E 0C 0D DD 0D AE 0D 80 0D 51 0D 22 0C F3 0C C5 0C 96

03 0C 02 E1 02 B7 02 8C 02 62 02 4C 02 35 02 15 01 F4 01 DE 01 C7 01 BB 01 AE 01 A2 01 89 01 6E 01 53 01 38 01 1E 01 03 00 DE 00 C7 00 A9 00 7A

00 89 00 8D 00 91 00 95 00 99 00 9D 00 A1 00 A5 00 A9 00 AD 00 B1 00 B5 00 B9 00 BD 00 C1 00 C5 00 C9 00 CD 00 D1 00 D5 00 D9 00 DD 00 E1 00 E5

0A 18 09 FF 09 E6 09 CD 09 B5 09 9C 09 83 09 6A 09 59 09 48 09 37 09 27 09 16 09 05 08 E3 08 B9 08 8B 08 5D 08 2F 08 01 07 D3 07 A5 07 77 07 49

0F FF 0F FF 0F FE 0F DD 0F BC 0F 9C 0F 7B 0F 64 0F 5A 0F 4A 0F 3E 0F 31 0F 1A 0F 5D 0F 4E 0F 40 0F 29 0E FD 0E D2 0E A6 0E 7B 0E 4F 0E 24 0D F8

04 EC 04 CB 04 AA 04 89 04 68 04 4B 04 27 04 06 03 E5 03 C4 03 A4 03 83 03 62 03 41 03 00 02 D4 02 A9 02 7D 02 52 02 26 01 FB 01 CF 01 A4 01 78

11-5

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

11-3

Turns Ratio Taps This table is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. It is a lookuptable giving the effective turns ratio (battery volts to kVp) of the system for each valid tap combination. It is calculated during tap calibration.

TABLE 113 TURNS RATIO TAPS

Relay Tap Selection

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

No Taps K1 K2 K2, K1 K3 K3, K1 K3, K2 K3, K2, K1 K4 K4, K1 K4, K2 K4, K2, K1 K4, K3 K4, K3, K1 K4, K3, K2, K4, K3, K2, K1 K5 K5, K1 K5, K2 K5, K2, K1 K5, K3 K5, K3, K1 K5, K3, K2 K5, K3, K2, K1 K6, K3 K6, K3, K1 K6, K3, K2 K6, K3, K2, K1

00 E7 00 E9 00 EB 00 ED 00 EF 00 F1 00 F3 00 F5 00 F7 00 F9 00 FB 00 FD 00 FF 01 01 01 03 01 05 01 07 01 09 01 0B 01 0D 01 0F 01 11 01 13 01 15 01 17 01 19 01 1B 01 1D 11-6

02 66 02 34 02 4F 02 7D 02 E6 03 28 03 33 03 62 03 4A 03 7F 03 AC 03 E1 04 25 04 65 04 76 04 C3 05 21 05 17 05 39 05 6A 05 9A 05 EB 06 24 06 8D 06 EA 06 F3 07 23 07 AF

03 B6 03 C4 03 DF 04 0D 04 76 04 B8 04 C3 04 F2 04 DA 05 0F 05 3C 05 71 05 B5 05 91 06 06 06 53 06 B1 06 A7 06 C9 06 FA 07 2A 07 7B 07 B4 08 1D 08 7A 08 83 08 B3 09 3F

00 96 00 A4 00 BF 00 ED 01 56 01 98 01 A3 04 D2 01 BA 01 EF 02 1C 02 51 02 95 02 D5 02 E6 03 33 03 91 03 87 03 A9 03 DA 04 0A 04 5B 04 94 04 FD 05 5A 05 63 05 93 06 1F

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

11-4

System Resistance Taps This table is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A look uptable giving the effective system resistance (battery to xray tube) for each valid tap combination. It is calculated during tap calibration.

TABLE 114 SYSTEM RESISTANCE TAPS

Relay Tap Selection

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

No Taps K1 K2 K2, K1 K3 K3, K1 K3, K2 K3, K2, K1 K4 K4, K1 K4, K2 K4, K2, K1 K4, K3 K4, K3, K1 K4, K3, K2, K4, K3, K2, K1 K5 K5, K1 K5, K2 K5, K2, K1 K5, K3 K5, K3, K1 K5, K3, K2 K5, K3, K2, K1 K6, K3 K6, K3, K1 K6, K3, K2 K6, K3, K2, K1

01 1F 01 21 01 23 01 25 01 27 01 29 01 2B 01 2D 01 2F 01 31 01 33 01 35 01 37 01 39 01 3B 01 3D 01 3F 01 41 01 43 01 45 01 47 01 49 01 4B 01 4D 01 4F 01 51 01 53 01 55 11-7

00 D3 00 E1 00 C7 00 D0 01 37 01 54 01 27 01 34 00 D2 00 EA 00 F9 01 11 01 3A 01 5F 01 51 01 8B 01 AC 01 7C 01 8F 01 A7 01 C1 01 FF 02 23 02 7C 02 B3 02 9C 02 B4 03 37

01 9B 01 A9 01 8F 01 98 01 FF 02 1C 02 53 01 FC 01 9A 01 B2 01 C1 01 D9 02 02 02 27 02 19 02 53 02 74 02 44 02 57 02 6F 02 89 02 C7 02 EB 03 44 03 7B 03 64 03 7C 03 E7

00 6F 00 7D 00 64 00 6C 00 6F 00 8C 00 96 00 9E 00 6E 00 86 00 95 00 AD 00 C2 00 C3 00 C5 00 C7 00 C8 00 D2 00 DB 00 DF 00 F9 01 37 01 5B 01 B4 01 C2 01 C2 01 C2 01 C5

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

11-5

Drive Parameters

TABLE 115 DRIVE PARAMETERS

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

DRIVE BYTES
Drive Threshold01 60 0A 14 00

Drive command deadband in DAC counts around the zero output value.
Drive Equal Value 01 61 0A 14 00

The maximum difference between the left and right drive output commands in DAC counts for which the left and right output commands will be made equal.
Left Output Zero Point 01 62 80 90 70

The DAC count which gives a zero left drive command.


Left Forward Output Gain 01 63 64 C8 32

The left output gain in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1.
Left Reverse Output Gain 01 64 64 C8 32

The left output gain in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1.
Right Output Zero Point 01 65 80 90 70

The DAC count which gives a zero right drive command.


Right Forward output Gain 01 66 64 C8 32

The right output gain in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1.
Right Reverse output Gain 01 67 64 C8 32

The right output gain in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1.

11-8

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 115 (CONT.) DRIVE PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Right Forward Position is Greater

01 68

01

01

00

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Indicates magnet polarity of the Hall Effect Drive Sensor. A 01 Hex indicates that pushing forward on the right drive handle results in a more positive transducer voltage than pulling back produces.
Left Forward Position is Greater 01 69 00 01 00

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Indicates magnet polarity of the Hall Effect Drive Sensor. A 01 Hex indicates that pushing forward on the left drive handle results in a more positive transducer voltage than pulling back produces.
Acceleration Factor 01 6A C8 FF 28

Controls handle sensitivity. The larger this number is the more responsive the unit will be after the drive handle is calibrated.
Left Minimum Input 01 6B 80 CO 10

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The minimum value from the left handle transducer.
Left Maximum Input 01 6C 80 FO 30

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The maximum value from the left handle transducer. DRIVE WORDS
Left Input Zero Point 01 6D 08 00 0C 00 05 00

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The number of A/D counts with no force applied to the drive handle on the left side.
Left Forward Input Gain 01 6F 00 D2 07 D0 00 19

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the left input in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21.

11-9

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 115 (CONT.) DRIVE PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Left Reverse Input Gain

01 71

00 D2

07 D0

00 19

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the left input in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21.
Right Input Zero Point 01 73 08 00 0C 00 05 00

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The number of A/D counts with no force is applied to the drive handle on the right side.
Right Forward Input Gain 01 75 00 D2 07 D0 00 19

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the right input in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21.
Right Reverse Input Gain 01 77 00 D2 07 D0 00 19

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the left input in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21.
Right Minimum Input 01 79 00 80 00 CO 00 10

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The minimum value from the right handle transducer.
Right Maximum Input 01 7B 00 80 00 FO 00 30

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The maximum value from the right handle transducer.

11-10

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

11-6

Charge Parameters

TABLE 116 CHARGE PARAMETERS

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

CHARGE BYTES TOP OFF TIME Additional charge time in minutes that the system will charge after switching to trickle mode. This is the absolute minimum time to Charge Complete. (Not used with PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1.) Maximum High Charge Time The maximum time in hours that the unit can charge. If this time is exceeded, an error condition is flagged and trickle charge is entered. Trickle Charge Clamp Voltage The maximum long term voltage allowed during trickle charge. High Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during charger calibration. High Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during charger calibration. Trickle Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during trickle charge calibration. Trickle Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during trickle charge calibration 01 7D AF* 2E** C8* FF** 32* 00**

01 7E

OF

14

0A

01 7F

7C

80

75

01 80

32

3C

28

01 81

19

23

0F

01 82

C8

E1

AF

01 83

64

7D

4B

* Values for PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1 ** Values for PROMS 46316685G1/46316686G1 and 46329187G1/46329188G1 or 46329187G2/46329188G2 11-11

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 116 (CONT.) CHARGE PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Start Timed Charge Counts The DAC count at which the final charge phase begins.

01 84

24* 1A** 1A***

34* 34** 34***

10* 10** 10***

High Charge Clamp Volts The maximum battery voltage in volts allowed during charging. Charging current will decrease in order to clamp the voltage.

01 85

82* 7F** 82***

85* 85** 87***

7D* 7D** 7D***

FINAL PHASE TIME The time to Charge Completed from the time the switch to the trickle charge rate occurs.

01 88

06

12

00

* Values for PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1 ** Values for PROMS 46316685G1/46316686G1 *** Values for PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1 or 46329187G2/46329188G2

11-12

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 116 (CONT.) CHARGE PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

CHARGE WORDS Feedback at High Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to High Charge High Output counts. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output. Feedback at High Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to High Charge Low Output counts. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output mA at High Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charging current in milliamps with the charge current demand DAC set to High Charge High Output counts. This parameter is calculated during charger calibration. It is used to determine what the charging current is for any given charge current demand DAC output. mA at High Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charging current in milliamps with the charge current demand DAC set to High Charge Low Output counts. This parameter is calculated during charger calibration. It is used to determine what the charging current is for any given charge current demand DAC output. 01 89 09 C4 13 88 04 B0

01 8B

04 4C

05 DC

02 58

01 8D

03 E8

04 E2

02 EE

01 8F

01 F4

02 EE

00 FA

11-13

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 116 (CONT.) CHARGE PARAMETERS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Feedback at Trickle Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to Trickle Charge High Output counts in the trickle charge mode. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output in the trickle charge mode. Feedback at Trickle Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to Trickle Charge Low Output counts in the trickle charge mode. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output in the trickle charge mode. Maximum Charging mA The maximum allowable charging current in milliamps. Charge Current Feedback Error The error window on the expected charge current feedback in VCO pulse count.

01 91

27 10

61 A8

13 88

01 93

13 88

3A 98

03 E8

01 97

09 C4

0B B8

07 D0

01 99

02 EE

03 E8

01 F4

11-14

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

11-7

Battery Parameters for PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1 or 46316685G1/46316686G1

TABLE 117 BATTERY PARAMETERS FOR PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1 OR 46316685G1/46316686G1

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

BATTERY WORDS TRICKLE LMT The number of charge cutoff cycles run before a complete charge is allowed. Both lower and upper bytes must be the same. Battery Aging Disable Enter 0000 to disable battery aging compensation. Monitor Full Capacity millivolts Battery voltage which corresponds to 100% capacity times 100. i.e. default of 2C 88 Hex is, decimal 11400 100 = 114.00 V. Battery Volts Calibration Count This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The number of VCO pulse counts obtained in a five second period during battery voltage meter calibration. Battery Calibration Millivolts This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The voltage in volts times 100 at the time that Battery Volts Calibration Counts was obtained. i.e. default of 2BCA. Hex is, decimal 11210 100 = 112.10 V. Breaker Trip Time The number of hours before breaker trips for certain charger failures. 01 9B 14 14* 09 09** FF FF* FF FF** 00 00* 00 00**

01 9D

19 19* 00 00**

FF FF* FF FF**

00 00* 00 00**

01 9F

2C 88

2E 18

2C 24

01 A1

8A CC

EA 60

4E 20

01 A3

2B CA

3A 98

1F 40

01 A5

03 03

FF FF

00 00

* Values for PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1 ** Values for PROMS 46316685G1/46316686G1

11-15

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

11-8

Battery Parameters for PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1 OR 46329187G2/46329188G2

TABLE 118 BATTERY PARAMETERS FOR PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

BATTERY WORDS TRICKLE LMT The number of charge cutoff cycles run before a complete charge is allowed. Both lower and upper bytes must be the same. Battery Aging Disable Enter 0000 to disable battery aging compensation. Monitor Full Capacity millivolts Battery voltage which corresponds to 100% capacity times 100. i.e. default of 2C EC Hex is, decimal 11500 100 = 115.00 V. Battery Volts Calibration Count This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The number of VCO pulse counts obtained in a five second period during battery voltage meter calibration. Battery Calibration Millivolts This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The voltage in volts times 100 at the time that Battery Volts Calibration Counts was obtained. i.e. default of 2BCA. Hex is, decimal 11210 100 = 112.10 V. Breaker Trip Time The number of hours before breaker trips for certain charger failures. 01 9B 09 09 FF FF 00 00

01 9D

19 19

FF FF

00 00

01 9F

2C EC

2E 18

2C 24

01 A1

8A CC

EA 60

4E 20

01 A3

2B CA

3A 98

1F 40

01 A5

03 03

FF FF

00 00

11-16

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE 118 (CONT.) BATTERY PARAMETERS FOR PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1 OR 46329187G2/46329188G2

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

01A7 Total Capacity Indicates the total capacity available over the range of the capacity bar graph in mASHR. 01A9 Idle Load Current Indicates the level of load current (in milliamps) on the batteries in the idle mode. 01AB Drive Load Current Indicates the level of load current (in milliamps) on the batteries in the drive mode. 01AD Field Light Load Current Indicates the level of load current (in milliamps) on the batteries when the field light is on. 01AF Prep Load Current Indicates the level of nonexposure load current (in milliamps) on the batteries in the xray mode. 01B1 Nominal 0% Capacity Millivolts Sets the nominal 0% capacity battery voltage (in tens of millivolts). 01B3 Full Charge Excess Capacity Indicates the amount of extra capacity (in mASHR) available at CHARGE COMPLETE.

1964

2328

03E8

012C

03E8

0032

0BB8

2710

01F4

09C4

1B58

01F4

0BB8

1B58

01F4

2BC0

2C88

2AF8

01F4

03E8

0000

11-17

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

11-9

Field Light Parameters for PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1 or 46316685G1/46316686G1

TABLE 119 FIELD LIGHT PARAMETERS FOR PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1 OR 46316685G1/46316686G1

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

FIELD LIGHT BYTES Field Light OnTime The time in seconds that the field light will be on after the field light switch is released. Maximum Field Light OnTime The maximum continuous field light operating time in seconds. Once this time has been exceeded the field light is turned off and will be disabled until Field Light Cool Time seconds have expired. Field Light Cool Time The cool (off) time in seconds required once the field light has been on for more than Maximum Field Light On Time. Minimum no Cool Time The time in seconds for which the field light will be disabled if an operator attempts to light the field light. This occurs only when field light heat capacity is approaching maximum limit. 01 A7 1E 2D 05

01 A8

C8

FF

64

01 A9

FF

FF

64

01 AA

08

0F

04

11-18

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

11-10

Field Light Parameters for PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1 OR 46329187G2/46329188G2

TABLE 1110 FIELD LIGHT PARAMETERS FOR PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

FIELD LIGHT BYTES Field Light OnTime The time in seconds that the field light will be on after the field light switch is released. Maximum Field Light OnTime The maximum continuous field light operating time in seconds. Once this time has been exceeded the field light is turned off and will be disabled until Field Light Cool Time seconds have expired. Field Light Cool Time The cool (off) time in seconds required once the field light has been on for more than Maximum Field Light On Time. Minimum no Cool Time The time in seconds for which the field light will be disabled if an operator attempts to light the field light. This occurs only when field light heat capacity is approaching maximum limit. 01 BB 1E 2D 05

01 BC

C8

FF

64

01 BD

FF

FF

64

01 BE

08

0F

04

11-19

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

11-11

Auto Cal Filament Table This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. This is the second of the two filament lookuptables giving the relationship between filament current DAC counts at emission current of 90 and 110 mA for all valid kVp stations. This table is updated after most exposures to maintain this relationship.

TABLE 1111 AUTO CAL FILAMENT TABLE

kVp at
Address

90 mA
Default Max Min Address

110 mA
Default Max Min

50 kVp 52 kVp 54 kVp 56 kVp 58 kVp 60 kVp 62 kVp 64 kVp 66 kVp 68 kVp 70 kVp 72 kVp 74 kVp 76 kVp 80 kVp 85 kVp 90 kVp 95 kVp 100 kVp 105 kVp 110 kVp 115 kVp 120 kVp 125 kVp

0C 2D 0C 31 0C 35 0C 39 0C 3D 0C 41 0C 45 0C 49 0C 4D 0C 51 0C 55 0C 59 0C 5D 0C 61 0C 65 0C 69 0C 6D 0C 71 0C 75 0C 79 0C 7D 0C 81 0C 85 0C 89

08 09 07 F5 07 E1 07 CD 07 B9 07 A5 07 91 07 7D 07 6D 07 5E 07 4E 07 3E 07 2E 07 1F 06 FF 06 D8 06 B9 06 9A 06 7B 06 5B 06 3C 06 1D 05 FE 05 DF

0F 64 0F 61 0F 37 0F 0C 0E E2 0E D8 0E CC 0E B3 0E 9C 0E 90 0E 83 0E 6D 0E 56 0E 4A 0E 31 0E 0C 0D DD 0D AE 0D 80 0D 51 0D 22 0C F3 0C C5 0C 96

03 0C 02 E1 02 B7 02 8C 02 62 02 4C 02 35 02 15 01 F4 01 DE 01 C7 01 BB 01 AE 01 A2 01 89 01 6E 01 53 01 38 01 1E 01 03 00 DE 00 C7 00 A9 00 7A

0C 2F 0C 33 0C 37 0C 3B 0C 3F 0C 43 0C 47 0C 4B 0C 4F 0C 53 0C 57 0C 5B 0C 5F 0C 63 0C 67 0C 6B 0C 6F 0C 73 0C 77 0C 7B 0C 7F 0C 83 0C 87 0C 8B

0A 18 09 FF 09 E6 09 CD 09 B5 09 9C 09 83 09 6A 09 59 09 48 09 37 09 27 09 16 09 05 08 E3 08 B9 08 8B 08 5D 08 2F 08 01 07 D3 07 A5 07 77 07 49

0F FF 0F FF 0F FE 0F DD 0F BC 0F 9C 0F 7B 0F 64 0F 5A 0F 4A 0F 3E 0F 31 0F 1A 0F 5D 0F 4E 0F 40 0F 29 0E FD 0E D2 0E A6 0E 7B 0E 4F 0E 24 0D F8

04 EC 04 CB 04 AA 04 89 04 68 04 4B 04 27 04 06 03 E5 03 C4 03 A4 03 83 03 62 03 41 03 00 02 D4 02 A9 02 7D 02 52 02 26 01 FB 01 CF 01 A4 01 78

11-20

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

11-12

Monitor Zero Capacity Millivolts for PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1 or 46316685G1/46316686G1

TABLE 1112 MONITOR ZERO CAPACITY MILLIVOLTS FOR PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1 OR 46316685G1/46316686G1

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Monitor Zero Capacity Millivolts Battery voltages which correspond to 0% capacity times 100. i.e. default of 2B C0. Hex is decimal. 11200 100 = 112.00V.

0C 8D

2B C0

2C 88

2B C0

11-21

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

11-13

Battery Aging Capacity Offset for PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1 OR 46329187G2/46329188G2

TABLE 1113 BATTERY AGING CAPACITY OFFSET FOR PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1

Data

Address
Hex Value

Default
Hex Value

Maximum
Hex Value

Minimum
Hex Value

Battery Aging Capacity Offset Offsets to total capacity in mAHR. When this value is nonzero, it has the effect of reducing the amount of capacity available over the range of the capacity display.

0C 8D

00 00

FF FF

00 00

11-22

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 12 ERROR CODES 12-1 Introduction This section contains error prompt listings, the probable cause, and recommended ac tions to correct the problem. The error listings are organized into three categories, Power Up Errors, Calibration Errors, and Applications Errors. Error prompts are listed in alphanumeric order within these three categories. Software detected errors are divided into three categories: 1. Software errors like Battery Error 4 and Check Sum Err 1. These involve calcu lations and parameter passing. 2. Data errors like Cal Charger Err 3. These are the result of comparing calibration values in RAM with allowed maximum or minimum values stored in PROM. 3. Hardware errors like Battery Error 1. These are the result of an error bit set dur ing a read; or comparing a calibration port value with the allowed maximum or minimum value stored in PROM. 12-2 Applications Error Handling Overview When an applications run time error occurs, the status signal which leads to the error is checked again to make sure that it wasn't a noise glitch that caused it. If the recheck indicates no problem, a glitch is assumed and the original error is ignored. When the recheck yields the error again, a fault is assumed and appropriate action is taken. This involves both displaying an error code and message, and logging the error code in a circular error buffer and adding it to a histogram of errors. If a fault is found during application code processing, the error code is displayed along with an appropriate er ror message. A fault will not necessarily bring down the whole system, it will only in hibit the applicable function. For example, a drive mode fault will inhibit drive, an x ray mode fault will inhibit x ray, and a charge fault will inhibit charging. The exception to this is the Watchdog time out error which disables all functions and places the proc essor in a power down state. 12-3 Circular Error Buffer This is a 256 Byte buffer in non-volatile RAM where error codes are stored in the order in which they occur. The most recent 256 error codes are kept. Any previous er ror codes are lost. 12-4 Histogram Of Errors This buffer, also in non-volatile RAM, keeps a history of the number of times each error has occurred. The error code count stops at 255, after which, any additional er rors are ignored by this buffer.

12-1

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 121 POWER UP ERROR CODES Error Number No Response Probable Cause Microprocessor operation verification test. If the displays do not turn on, check the diagnostic LED array on the processor board. If all LEDs are on, the processor is not executing the test. If all LEDs are off, the test failed. This test assumes that the power supplies are working correctly. EPROM Check Sum is calculated and compared with stored value. Error Code 81 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a failure. The first write to the RAM will not be stored if the RAM battery is below 2.0 volts. The processor writes to RAM then reads the location. An error occurs if the value written is not the same as the value read. Error Code 82 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a failure.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Check microprocessor and EPROM if failure occurs.

TEST 01 FAILED EPROM Check Sum TEST 02 FAILED RAM Battery Test

Check EPROM and microprocessor if failure occurs. Check RAM and its associated circuitry. Check the microprocessor.

TEST 03 FAILED Auxiliary RAM Test

Preserves data form bottom of RAM to top of Data Check RAM and its associated circuitry. Make Base. Does not preserve data above top of Data Base. sure RAM is in the correct socket. Error Code 83 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a Check the microprocessor. failure. Check the option switch, S96 on CPU 46232828 or S75 on CPU 46264974, to see that ram is selected. Option switch 1 must be in the on (closed) position. Closed = 2k of RAM, open = 4k of RAM. Calculates the Check Sum for the Calibration Data Base and compares it with the stored value. Test fails if they are not equal. Entering Calibration will give a more specific error code for the check sum failure. Error Code 84 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a failure. Write to timer and read back several times. Test fails if timer is high for more than 75 milliseconds or less than 25 milliseconds. Error Code 85 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a failure. Timer 1 can not be checked because the program does not have direct control of its input gate. Initialize timer 0 for 16 kHz and timer 2 for 120 kHz. Count pulses to verify frequency. Check output 2 for 50% duty cycle. Error Code 86 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a failure. Read +5 volt power supply. Test fails if result is below +4.5 volts or above +5.5 volts. Error Code 87 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a failure. Also tests +24V and 15 supplies if option switch is set to do so. (+24V and 15V supply test only with firmware 46302688G1/ 46302687G1 and later on CPU 46264974. Test enabled by dip switch #3.) Check Calibration and RAM.

TEST 04 FAILED Calibration Data Base Check Sum

TEST 05 FAILED Watchdog Timer

Check HC123 one shot and associated circuitry.

TEST 06 FAILED Programmable Interval Timer 0 and 2

Check 82C54 timer, HC151 8 to 1 MUX, oscillator, and all associated circuitry.

TEST 07 FAILED Analog to Digital Converter Test

Check +5 volt supply, AD574A A/D Converter, LF398 sample and hold, AD7506 16 to 1 MUX, HC374 latch, and all associated circuitry.

12-2

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 122 CALIBRATION ERROR CODES Error Number CALDAT WARNING Probable Cause Something is out of limits. A maximum or minimum value was inserted so that calibration can continue. Continue calibrating and watch for maximum or minimum limit errors. Counter overflowed while determining battery voltage.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action

BATTERY ERROR 1

Frequency at Charger Board TP6 must be less than 10 kHz. Multiplexer U76 on Charger Board must be operating properly. Battery voltage must be properly calibrated. Check connection between CPU and Charger boards. Battery voltage must be properly calibrated. Check VCO. Check Charger board. Repeat the test or calibration procedure that caused the error. Replace PROM if problem continues. Calibrate volt meter. Check connection between CPU and Charger boards. Frequency at Charger Board TP6 must be from 55 to 75 Hz per volt. For example a battery voltage of 115.0 volts should produce a frequency of 6.3 to 8.6 kHz. Frequency at Charger Board TP6 must be less than 60 kHz. Multiplexer U76 on Charger Board must be operating properly. Check connection between CPU and Charger boards. Check for Digital to Analog Converter output at least 0.5 volts at TP29 on the CPU Board Does charger charge? Does charge voltage develop across charging resistor AMX1 A3 R1?

BATTERY ERROR 2

Reading battery voltage indicated less than 80 volts.

BATTERY ERROR 3

Reading battery voltage indicated more than 150 volts.

BATTERY ERROR 4

Voltage value was not saved. An invalid condition was detected. Could not determine if battery voltage was a loaded or unloaded value. Data for either upper of lower battery calibration limit has been exceeded.

BATRY WORD LIMIT

CAL CHGR ERR 1

Hardware counter overflowed while determining charging current.

CAL CHGR ERR 2

Reading battery current port indicated charge current frequency was missing.

12-3

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 122 (CONT.) CALIBRATION ERROR CODES Error Number CAL CHGR ERR 3 Probable Cause Either upper or lower charger calibration limit has been exceeded.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Calibrate charger. Check connection between CPU and Charger boards. Check connection between CPU and Charger boards. Does CHARGE SCALESELECT signal change state during charger calibration? During Calibration, the charge Digital to Analog Converter output voltage at TP29 on the CPU Board should be: For the first conversion 0.5 to 1.5 volts when CHARGE SCALESELECT is not asserted. For the second conversion 1.5 to 2.5 volts when CHARGE SCALESELECT is not asserted. For the third conversion 2.9 to 4.9 volts when CHARGE SCALESELECT is asserted. For the fourth conversion 6.8 to 8.8 volts when CHARGE SCALESELECT is asserted. The average frequency at Charger board TP6 should be: 1.8 to 2.4 kHz per amp of charge current when CHARGE SCALESELECT is not asserted 18 to 24 Hz per milliamp of charge current when CHARGE SCALESELECT is asserted Repeat the Tap Calibration Procedure. Check mAs Calibration. Check for bad connections in the Xray generator. Repeat the Tap CAL Procedure. Check mAs Calibration. Calibrate kVp. Check generator tap relay wiring. Charge if battery voltage is less than 112 volts. Repeat the Tap Calibration Procedure. Check mAs Calibration. Calibrate kVp. Check generator tap relay wiring. Check generator tap relay wiring. Repeat the Tap Calibration Procedure.

CAL TAP ERROR 1

The proper mA could not be reached by changing the kVp.

CAL TAP ERROR 2

More than 140 kVp at tube voltage port with a tap selection that should provide less than 140 kVp.

CAL TAP ERROR 3

More than 35 kVp at tube voltage port with a tap selection that should provide 35 kVp.

CAL TAP ERROR 4

A high order tap combination produced less kVp then a low order tap combination.

12-4

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 122 (CONT.) CALIBRATION ERROR CODES Error Number CAL TAP ERROR 5 Probable Cause Even With the filament current digital to analog converter at full count, not enough emission current could be produced.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Check mAs Calibration. Check filament current by checking voltage across Filament and kVp control board resistor AMX1 A4 A2 R188. Voltage should be about 0.5 volts. This is 0.1 volt per amp of filament current. Check generator tap relay wiring. Repeat the Tap Calibration Procedure. Check filament current by checking voltage across Filament and kVp Control board resistor AMX1 A4 A2 R188. Voltage should be about 0.5 volts. This is 0.1 volt per amp of filament current. Check generator tap relay wiring. Repeat the Tap Calibration Check mAs Calibration. Either upper or lower limit of filament current calibration points has been exceeded. Refer to the limit error description for additional information. This error always occurs after a limit error. Refer to the limit error description for additional information. Calibrate charger. Calibrate charger. Check connection between CPU and Charger boards. Does CHARGE SCALESELECT signal change state during charger calibration? During Calibration, the charge Digital to Analog Converter output voltage at TP29 on the CPU Board should be: For the first conversion 0.5 to 1.5 volts when CHARGE SCALESELECT is not asserted. For the second conversion 1.5 to 2.5 volts when CHARGE SCALESELECT is not asserted. For the third conversion 2.9 to 4.9 volts when CHARGE SCALESELECT is asserted. For the fourth conversion 6.8 to 8.8 volts when CHARGE SCALESELECT is asserted. The average frequency at Charger board TP6 should be: 1.8 to 2.4 kHz per amp of charge current when CHARGE SCALESELECT is not asserted. 18 to 24 Hz per milliamp of charge current when CHARGE SCALESELECT is asserted.

CAL TAP ERROR 6

Even with the filament current digital to analog converter at its lowest value, the emission current was too high.

CAL TAP ERROR 7

One or more of the tap calibration parameters was out of limits, data exceeded either upper or lower limit value of selected tap. This error always occurs after a limit error. One or more of the Filament current table data field limits was exceeded. Reading battery charger port indicated either upper or lower calibration limit exceeded. Battery charger upper or lower calibration limit exceeded.

CAL TUBE ERR 1 CAL TUBE ERR 3 CHARG BYTE LIMIT CHARG WORD LIMIT

12-5

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 122 (CONT.) CALIBRATION ERROR CODES Error Number CHECK SUM ERR 1 CHECK SUM ERR 2 CHECK SUM ERR 3 CHECK SUM ERR 4 CHECK SUM ERR 5 CHECK SUM ERR 6 CHECK SUM ERR 7 CHECK SUM ERR 8 CHECK SUM ERR 9 CHECK SUM ERR 10 CHECK SUM ERR 11 DRIVE BYTE LIMIT Probable Cause Drive calibration bytes check sum failed. Drive calibration words check sum failed. Charger calibration bytes check sum failed. Charger calibration words check sum failed. Battery calibration words check sum failed. XRay calibration bytes check sum failed. XRay calibration words check sum failed. Field light calibration bytes check sum failed. Turns ratio calibration check sum failed. XRay circuit resistance calibration check sum failed. Filament current tables have a check sum error, or were not calibrated. Drive upper or lower calibration limit was exceeded.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Recalibrate drive. Recalibrate drive. Recalibrate charger. Recalibrate charger. Calibrate voltmeter and generator. Calibrate generator. Calibrate generator. Calibrate field light. Calibrate generator. Calibrate generator. If no other generator checksums are present, Calibrate Filament Current. Calibrate drive. Check wiring to drive handle transducers. Check for +10 volts at transducer input. Does transducer output change when handle is moved? Is transducer output always between 1 and 9 volts? Check the Handle Check* circuitry, AMX1 A2A1 shell 4F5. TP 29 should be 9.9V+/1% during Handle Calibration. Calibrate drive. Check wiring to drive handle transducers. Check for +10 volts at transducer input. Does transducer output change when handle is moved? Is transducer output always between 1 and 9 volts? Check the Handle Check * circuitry AMX1 A2A1 shell 4F5. TP 29 should be 9.9V +/1% during Handle Calibration. Calibrate field light. Calibrate field light.

DRIVE WORD LIMIT

Drive upper or lower calibration limit was exceeded.

FLDLIT TIME LIMT FLDLT BYTE LIMIT

An invalid time was entered during field light calibration. Reading field light data indicated either upper or lower time limit was exceeded.

12-6

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 122 (CONT.) CALIBRATION ERROR CODES Error Number HIGH FIL LIMIT Probable Cause One or more of the filament current calibration data parameters exceed the limit.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action IGNORE IF: The unit is being calibrated for the first time with a new battery backed RAM. The message did not occur during filament current calibration. OTHERWISE: Calibrate mAs. Check filament current by checking voltage across Filament and kVp Control board resistor AMX1 A4 A2 R188 (sheet 2 location F9). Voltage should be about 0.5 volts. This is 0.1 volt per amp of filament current. Check xray tube Check filament transformer Calibrate drive. Check wiring to drive handle transducers. Check for +10 volts at transducer input. Is transducer output between 2.5 and 7.5 volts? Does transducer output change when handle is moved? Check that TP29 is 9.9V +/ 1% during Handle Calibration Calibrate drive. Check wiring to drive handle transducers. Check for +10 volts at transducer input. Does transducer output change when handle is moved? Check that TP29 is 9.9V +/ 1% during Handle Calibration. Calibrate drive. Check wiring to drive handle transducers. Check for +10 volts at transducer input. Does transducer output change when handle is moved? Check that TP29 is 9.9V +/ 1% during Handle Calibration. Was the handle moved in the correct direction in response to prompts? Calibrate drive. Check that TP29 is 9.9V +/ 1% during Handle Calibration Calibrate mAs. Is battery voltage drop excessive: See Section 14-1. Are tap relays functioning properly? Check the High Voltage Cables for shorts. Calibrate mAs.

HNDL CAL ERR 1

Drive handle zero point value was outofrange.

HNDL CAL ERR 2

Calculated forward gain was out of range.

HNDL CAL ERR 3

Calculated reverse gain was out of range.

HANDLE CAL ERR 4

Drive handle calibration indicated improper polarity relationship between zero, forward, and reverse calibration voltages.

KVP CAL ERROR 1

The required kVp and mA can not be reached. Tap combinations do not go high enough. Are tap relays functioning properly? No tap relays pulled in and the required kVp and mA cannot be reached.

KVP CAL ERROR 2

12-7

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 122 (CONT.) CALIBRATION ERROR CODES Error Number KVP CAL ERROR 4 Probable Cause One or more of the calibration parameters is out of limits.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Were kVp values entered correctly? Is bleeder properly calibrated? Are all tap relays functioning properly? IGNORE IF: The unit is being calibrated for the first time with a new battery backed RAM. The message did not occur during filament current calibration. OTHERWISE: Calibrate mAs. Check filament current by checking voltage across Filament and kVp Control board resistor AMX1 A4 A2 R188 (sheet 2 location F9). Voltage should be about 0.5 volts. This is 0.1 volt per amp of filament current. Check xray tube. Check filament transformer. Was the injected current more than 110 mA? Is the frequency at Filament and kVp Control board TP2 more than 18 kHz? Check data bus connection on CPU board. Check battery backed RAM.

LOW FIL LIMIT

One or more of the filament current calibration data parameters is less than the minimum allowed.

MAS CAL ERROR 1

The frequency produced by injecting 100 mA during mAs meter calibration was to high causing the counter to overflow. The check to see if data base parameters are being written correctly produced an error. Data read from memory location is not what was written to that location. The slope of emission current vs kVp was calculated to be either too flat or too steep at the last tap selection. This error is valid only during tap calibration. The battery voltage to kVp multiplication factor (effective turns ratio) was out of range for the last tap selected.

MAS CAL ERROR 4

RAM READBACK ERR SYS RESIST LIMIT

Is mAs properly calibrated? Is kVp properly calibrated? Check the batteries for excessive voltage drop. See Section 14-1. Is mAs properly calibrated? Is kVp properly calibrated? Check batteries for excessive voltage drop. See Section 14-1. Is the frequency at Charger board TP6 more than 10 kHz? Is multiplexer AMX1 A3 A1 U76 on Charger Board functioning properly? Calibrate voltmeter. Check connection between CPU and Charger boards. Frequency at Charger Board TP6 must be from 55 to 75 Hz per volt. For example a battery voltage of 115.0 volts should produce a frequency of 6.3 to 8.6 kHz.

TURN RATIO LIMIT

VOLTMETER ERR 1

Battery voltage frequency is too high causing the counter to overflow.

VOLTMETER ERR 4

One or more of the battery voltage calibration data base parameters is out of range.

12-8

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 122 (CONT.) CALIBRATION ERROR CODES Error Number XRAY BYTE LIMIT Probable Cause One or more of the xray calibration parameters just adjusted are out of range.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action DURING MAS CALIBRATION: Was correct mA value entered? Check connection between CPU and Filament/kVp boards. Frequency at Filament and kVp Board TP2 must be between 14 and 18 kHz. Is your mA meter working properly? DURING TAP CALIBRATION: Indicates not enough taps could be calibrated without exceeding the maximum allowable kVp. Is kVp calibration correct? is mAs calibration correct? Is battery voltage more than 117 volts? DURING MAS CALIBRATION: Was correct mA value entered? Check connection between CPU and Filament/kVp boards. Frequency at CPU Board TP2 must be between 14 and 18 kHz. Is your mA meter working properly? DURING KVP CALIBRATION: Were kVp values entered correctly? Is the bleeder properly calibrated? Are all tap relays functioning properly? DURING FILAMENT TABLE CALIBRATION: Indicates that the turn off delay, the time from the stop command being asserted to XRAY ON going away is greater than 2.0 ms. Is the kVp calibration jumper removed?

XRAY WORD LIMIT

One or more of the xray calibration parameters just adjusted is out of limits.

12-9

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 123 APPLICATIONS ERROR CODES Error Number ERROR 12 Left Drive Stall Release Handle Probable Cause Left stall signal was detected.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Occasional occurrence are normal (i.e. elevator thresholds, etc.) Check snubbers on motor relays. Check brakes. Check motors. Code 12 Hex in the error list. The message is normal if the unit was being driven fast down an incline, the wheels left the ground, or occasionally while positioning with the tube not parked. Infrequent occurrences are not a problem! Check drive fuses (3). Check to see that connectors are in place in the drive module. Check drive relays. Code 19 in the error list. Occasional occurrence are normal (i.e. elevator thresholds, etc.) Check snubbers on motor relays. Check brakes. Check motors. Code 13 Hex in the error list. If the unit just came off of a charge cycle, the surface charge must be bled off of the batteries. (15 to 20 minute wait) Driving the unit, turning on the field light, or repeatedly prepping the unit will reduce the wait. This message is dependent on technique. Lower techniques can be used at high battery voltage. Code 44 Hex in the error list. Code 45 Hex in the error list. A battery charge cycle may be required if the bar graph shows low capacity. Check batteries if bar graph shows significant charge remaining. See Section 14-1. Check DISPLAY OK signal of the On Board Status port on sheet 4 location F 8 of the CPU schematic. Check connection from CPU to display controller. Check display controller. Error Code 23 Hex in the error list. Does the unit pass power-up tests? Check the watchdog U137 on CPU 46232828 or U65 on 46264974 and associated components. Is there excessive noise somewhere that may cause the CPU to get lost. Are there glitches on CPU reset line? Error Code 70 Hex in the Error List.

ERROR 19 Release Handle

Invalid drive command feedback was detected.

ERROR 13 Right Drive Stall Release Handle

Right stall signal was detected.

ERROR 44 Battery too High Voltage Recovery is Required

Battery voltage was higher than expected during prep.

ERROR 45 Battery too Low Charge Required

Battery voltage was lower than expected during prep.

ERROR 23 Display Error

The DISPLAY OK status signal was low indicating the display controller malfunctioned, or there was faulty feedback.

ERROR 70 Halting Error

Watch dog timer shut the system down.

12-10

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 123 (CONT.) APPLICATIONS ERROR CODES Error Number ERROR 101 Charge Fault Probable Cause Charging current feedback value was high during high current charging.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Check BAT V & CHARGER CUR SEL signal of the Charger and Drive Control port on sheet 4 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Is the charge current demand DAC functioning properly? Are multiplexers U77 on CPU 46232828 or U123 on CPU 46264974 and U76 on Charger Board functioning properly? Was there a very large step change in line voltage? Error Code 01 Hex in the error list. Check BAT V & CHARGER CUR SEL signal of the Charger and Drive Control port on sheet 4 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Is the charge current demand DAC functioning properly? Are multiplexers U77 on CPU 46232828 or U123 on CPU 46264974 and U76 on Charger Board functioning properly? Was there a very large drop in line voltage? Was charging initiated immediately after the unit was just charged? The charger may saturate faster than the firmware can compensate in this case. Were locks or extraneous loads left on? Error Code 02 Hex in the error list. Check FREQ FDBK 0 signal of the On Board Control port on sheet 5 Location B 9 of the CPU schematic. Is the charge current demand DAC functioning properly? Are multiplexers U77 on CPU 46232828 or U123 on CPU 46264974 and U76 on Charger Board functioning properly? Was there a very large change in line voltage? Error Code 03 Hex in the error list. Check CHARGE SCALE SELECT signal of the Charger and Drive Control port on sheet 4 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Is the charge current demand DAC functioning properly? Are multiplexers U77 on CPU 46232828 or U123 on 46264974 and U76 on Charger Board functioning properly? Was there a very large drop in line voltage? Was charging initiated immediately after the unit was just charged? The charger may saturate faster than the firmware can compensate in this case. Error Code 04 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 102 Charge Fault

Charging current feedback value was low during high current charging.

ERROR 103 Charge Fault

Charging current feedback value was high during trickle charge.

ERROR 104 Charge Fault

Charging current feedback value was low during trickle charge.

12-11

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 123 (CONT.) APPLICATIONS ERROR CODES Error Number ERROR 105 Charge Fault Probable Cause The charger has been operating at full charger output for more than 15 hours.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Was the unit calibrated properly? Is the line voltage low? Was the battery voltage below 110 volts before the charge was initiated? Were the batteries discharged to less than 108 volts? If so a few charge and run cycles may be needed to rejuvenate them. Error Code 05 Hex in the error list. Check FREQ FDBK 0 signal of the On Board Control port on sheet 5 Location B 9 of the CPU schematic. If a voltage is developed across AMX1-A3-R1 when the unit is first plugged in, the feedback circuitry is defective, otherwise look for a faulty connection or a charge board failure. Error Code 06 Hex in the error list. Check CHARGE SCALE SELECT signal of the Charger and Drive Control port on sheet 4 Location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Does the charge command reach the charge board correctly? Error Code 07 Hex in the error list. Check stall circuits from drive board to CPU. Error Code 10 Hex in the error list. Check stall circuits from drive board to CPU. Error Code 11 Hex in the error list. Check connections from the CPU board to the drive control board. Check the feedback buffers on the CPU. Check drive module fuses. Check the feedback circuits on the drive control board. Check to see if all connectors in the drive module are in place. Error Code 14 Hex in the error list. Check current from the CPU board to the drive control board. Check the feedback buffers on the CPU. Check drive module fuses. Check the feedback circuits on the drive control board. Check to see if all connectors in the drive module are in place. Error Code 15 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 106 Charge Fault

Charge current feedback value was zero.

ERROR 107 Charge Fault

Charge clamp voltage was exceeded at zero charge current demand.

ERROR 210 Drive Fault ERROR 211 Drive Fault ERROR 214 Drive Fault

Left stall feedback circuitry is defective. A stall is indicated after the drive board has been reset. Right stall feedback circuitry is defective A stall is indicated after the drive boardhas been reset. Left drive current feedback from the drive control was higher than the command from the CPU board.

ERROR 215 Drive Fault

Left drive current feedback from the drive control was lower than the command from the CPU board.

12-12

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 123 (CONT.) APPLICATIONS ERROR CODES Error Number ERROR 216 Drive Fault Probable Cause Right drive current feedback from the drive control was higher than the command fromthe CPU board.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Check connections from the CPU board to the drive control board. Check the feedback buffers on the CPU. Check drive module fuses. Check the feedback circuits on the drive control board. Check to see if all connectors in the drive module are in place. Error Code 16 Hex in the error list. Check connections from the CPU board to the drive control board. Check the feedback buffers on the CPU. Check drive module fuses. Check the feedback circuits on the drive control board. Check to see if all connectors in the drive module are in place. Error Code 17 Hex in the error list. Calibrate the handle if the error occurs when the handle is pushed all the way forward or pulled all the way back. Make sure that the handle is pushed all the way forward to the stop and pulled all the way back to the stop during calibration. Check connectors and wiring to the drive handle transducers. Check the feedback buffers on the CPU. TP-15 on CPU should be +10 volts. Check that the +10V supply from the CPU to the transducers is intact. Check the data acquisition circuitry; analog MUX, sample and hold, and Analog to Digital converter. Error Code 18 Hex in the error list. Check 60 HZ EN and 60 HZ INV RELAY signals of the Generator Control 1 port on sheet 6 location B 7 of the CPU schematic. Determine why 60HZ INV OK signal does not go high when the 60Hz inverter is turned on. (60HZ EN and 60HZ INV RELAY must both be asserted) Check Rotor Controller Board AMX1-A3-A2 Q85 and Q86 FETs case to ground with J2 removed, resistance should be greater than 2 megohm. Check drivers at TP-4 and TP-5 on the Rotor Controller Board. Check 6 amp fuse on the Rotor Controller Board. Error Code 20 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 217 Drive Fault

Right drive current feedback from the drive control was lower than the command from the CPU board.

ERROR 218 Drive Fault

One or both handle signals were out of range. This indicates a potential circuit problem.

ERROR 320 Generator Fault

The 60 Hz inverter feedback failed when attempting to light field lamp.

12-13

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 123 (CONT.) APPLICATIONS ERROR CODES Error Number ERROR 321 Generator Fault Probable Cause The 60 Hz inverter feedback failed after the field lamp was turned on.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Check 60 HZ EN and 60 HZ INV RELAY signals of the Generator Control 1 port on sheet 6 location B 7 of the CPU schematic. Determine why 60HZ INV OK signal goes low after the 60Hz inverter is turned on. (60HZ EN and 60HZ INV RELAY must both be asserted). Check Rotor Controller Board AMX1-A3-A2 Q85 and Q86 FETs case to ground with J2 removed, resistance should be greater than 2 megohm. Check drivers at TP-4 and TP-5 on the Rotor Controller Board. Check 6 amp fuse on the Rotor Controller Board. Error Code 21 Hex in the error list. Check signals of the Charger and Drive Control port on sheet 4 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check CPU connection to the charger board. If battery voltage when measured with a DVM indicates voltage is truly below 90V, the batteries should be replaced. Check VCO frequency to CPU. Should be from 55 to 75 Hz per battery volt. Error Code 22 Hex in the error list. Check BAT & CHARGE CUR SEL signals of the Charger and Drive Control port on sheet 4 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check VCO frequency to CPU. Should be from 55 to 75 Hz per battery volt. Error Code 26 Hex in the error list. Recalibration is required to clear this fault. Error Code 2F Hex in the error list.

ERROR 322 Battery Fault

Battery voltage is less than 90 volts. Feedback circuit is probably defective.

ERROR 326 Battery Fault

Battery voltage went above 150 volts indicating a probable feedback circuit fault.

ERROR 42F Calibration Fault

A fault occurred with the auto calibration data base. RAM is most likely defective. Power up and Calibration error prompts may provide additional information. The Rotor Interlock Feedback signal was active during the prep cycle pre-exposure interlock check.

ERROR 430 Generator Fault

Check ROTOR INTLK signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 and ROTOR SELECT signal of the Generator Control 2 port on sheet 4 location B 8 of the CPU schematic. Are the 60hz clocks at FETS AMX1-A3-A2 Q85 and Q86? Does relay AMX1-A3-A2-K39 pull in? Is the rotor ok? Error Code 30 Hex in the error list. Connector intact from CPU to filament control board? DAC output correct? Is it approximately 0.069 volts per kVp. Is the analog multiplexer working correctly? Error Code 31 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 431 Generator Fault

The kVp Demand Feedback was high after command was output during the prep cycle.

12-14

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 123 (CONT.) APPLICATIONS ERROR CODES Error Number ERROR 432 Generator Fault Probable Cause The Filament Current Demand Feedback was high after command was output during the prep cycle.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Connector intact from CPU to filament control board? Does the filament inverter turn on? The filament current feedback must be within 0.69 volts of the command from the CPU. Use 3.0V for PROMS 46303815G1/46303816G1 and later. Error Code 32 Hex in the error list. Check drive level from the CPU to the filament board. Should be about 0.0V at 50 kVp, 0.4V at 80 kVp and 1.3V at 125 kVp. Connector intact from CPU to filament control board? The leakage compensation feedback must be within 0.2 volts of the command from the CPU. Error Code 33 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 433 Generator Fault

Leakage Compensation Command feedback was high after command was output during the prep cycle.

ERROR 435 Generator Fault

Tap Feedback did not correspond with taps selected during the prep cycle.

Check TAP1 FDBK through TAP6 FDBK signal of the Generator and AEC Control port on sheet 3 location A 5 of the CPU schematic. Check connection to the 1kHz board. Check tap select circuitry on the 1kHz board. Check wiring to tap relay coils. Error Code 35 Hex in the error list. Check X-RAY ON signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check XRAY ON circuit from filament/kVp control board to the CPU. Error Code 36 Hex in the error list. Check BU TMR OKAY signal of the On Board Status port on sheet 4 location F 8of the CPU schematic. Was X-RAY ON asserted at some time other than during an exposure (by noise perhaps)? This would be the case if the error log does not have 66 codes. Check for loose or missing ground connections in the generator and high voltage circuits. Error Code 37 Hex in the error list. Check EXP START CMND signal of the Generator Control 1 port on sheet 6 location B 7 and X-RAY ON signals of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Does the start command get to the inverter? Does the safety contactor pull in? Is high voltage produced? If so, is the resulting kVp what was selected? Do the correct tap relays pull in? Check the XRAY ON circuitry. Check kVp feedback circuitry. Error Code 39 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 436 Generator Fault

The X-RAY ON status signal was asserted in pre-exposure interlock check during the prep cycle.

ERROR 437 Generator Fault

Back Up Timer Ok status signal was not asserted in pre-exposure interlock check during the prep cycle. This error will follow a 466 error.

ERROR 439 Generator Fault

The X-ray On status signal was not asserted within two milliseconds after the Exposure Start Command signal was asserted.

12-15

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 123 (CONT.) APPLICATIONS ERROR CODES Error Number ERROR 43A Generator Fault Probable Cause Rotor Interlock feedback was low during the exposure interlock check.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Check ROTOR INTLK signal of the Critical Status Port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic, and ROTOR SELECT* signals of the Generator Control 2 port on sheet 4 location B 8 of the CPU schematic. Is 60Hz inverter functioning? Check feedback circuits. Error Code 3A Hex in the error list. Check TAP1* through TAP6* of the Generator Control 2 port on sheet 4 location B 8 of the CPU schematic, and TAP 1 FDBK through TAP 6 FDBK of the Generator and AEC Status Port on sheet 3 location E 7 of the CPU schematic. Check connection to the 1kHz board. Check tap select circuitry on the 1kHz board. Check wiring to tap relay coils. Check tap select signal receivers on the CPU board. Error Code 3B Hex in the error list. Check KVP DMN FDBK+ and KVP DMN FDBK- on sheet 5 location E 1 of the CPU schematic. Check AMUX1 AMUX2, and AMUX3 signal of the A/D Control port on sheet 5 location E 6 of the CPU schematic. Check connection to the filament/kVp board. Check feedback circuitry. Check drive level from the CPU to the filamentboard. Should be about 0.069 volts per kVp. Error Code 3D Hex in the error list. Check FIL FDBK+ and FIL FDBK- on sheet 5 location F 1 of the CPU schematic. Check AMUX1 AMUX2, and AMUX3 signal of the A/D Control port on sheet 5 location E 6 of the CPU schematic. Is the unit properly calibrated? If the initial kVp is off by more than 8% a recalibration is required. Check the feedback circuitry. Error Code 3E Hex in the error list. Check X-RAY ON signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 and EXP START CMND signal of the Generator Control 1 port on sheet 6 location B 7 of the CPU schematic. Check that the kVp cal jumper is not installed. Does the stop command get to the stop SCR? Error Code 43 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 43B Generator Fault

Tap feedback did not correspond with the taps selected during the exposure interlock check.

ERROR 43D Generator Fault

During the exposure interlock check, KVP DMN FDBK was high.

ERROR 43E Generator Fault

During the exposure interlock check, FIL FDBK was high.(Only displayed after 100 occurrences)

ERROR 443 Generator Fault

The X-Ray On signal did not become inactive within two milliseconds after the Exposure Stop Command. This error will be immediately followed by the breaker tripping.

12-16

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 123 (CONT.) APPLICATIONS ERROR CODES Error Number ERROR 450 Generator Fault Probable Cause For nonOrion xray tubes: The tube pressure switch was open during the prep cycle pre-exposure interlock check. For Orion xray tubes only: The tube temperature switch was open during the prep cycle pre-exposure interlock check.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Check X-RAY PRESS SW signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. For nonOrion xray tubes only: Check the connection from the CPU to the pressure switch. For Orion xray tubes only: Check the connection from the CPU to the temperature switch. Check for a faulty switch. Check the receiving circuits on the CPU. Error Code 50 Hex in the error list. Check 60HZ INV OK signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the connection from the CPU to the 60Hz inverter. Check for faulty feedback circuitry. Error Code 53 Hex in the error list. Check 1KHZ INVERTER OK signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the connection from the CPU to the 1kHz inverter board. Check for faulty feedback circuitry. Error Code 54 Hex in the error list. Check TAP1 FDBK through TAP6 FDBK signals of the Generator and AEC Status port on sheet 3 location 7 of the CPU schematic. Check connection to the 1kHz board. Check tap select circuitry on the 1kHz board. Check wiring to tap relay coils. Check tap select signal receivers on the CPU board. Error Code 56 Hex in the error list. Check 60HZ INV OK signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the connection from the CPU to the 60Hz inverter. Check that the 60Hz inverter turns on. Check for faulty feedback circuitry. Error Code 57 Hex in the error list. Check ROTOR INTLK signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8, and ROTOR SELECT signal of the Generator Control 2 port on sheet 4 location B 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the connection from the CPU to the 60Hz inverter. Check that the 60Hz inverter turns on. Check that the rotor select relay pulls in. Check for faulty feedback circuitry. Error Code 58 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 453 Generator Fault

The 60 Hz Inverter Ok signal was high and the field light was not on during the prep cycle pre-exposure interlock check.

ERROR 454 Generator Fault

The 1k Hz Inverter Ready signal was high and the field light was not on during the prep cycle pre-exposure interlock check.

ERROR 456 Generator Fault

Tap select feedback indicated one or more taps were active when none were selected.

ERROR 457 Generator Fault

The 60 Hz Inverter Ok signal was not asserted when 60 Hz inverter was turned on during the prep cycle.

ERROR 458 Generator Fault

Rotor Interlock Feedback was not asserted when 60 Hz inverter was turned on during prep cycle.

12-17

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 123 (CONT.) APPLICATIONS ERROR CODES Error Number ERROR 459 Generator Fault Probable Cause The kVp Command Feedback was low after command was output during the prep cycle.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Check connection to the filament/kVp board. Check drive level from the CPU to the filamentboard. Should be about 0.069 volts per kVp. Check feedback circuitry. Error Code 59 Hex in the error list. Check LEAKAGE COMP FDBK+ and LEAKAGE COMP FDBK- on sheet 5 location H 1 of the CPU schematic. Check AMUX1 AMUX2, and AMUX3 signal of the A/D Control port on sheet 5 location E 6 of the CPU schematic. Check connection to the filament/kVp board. Check drive level from the CPU to the filamentboard. Should be about 0.0V at 50 kVp, 0.4V at 80 kVp and 1.3V at 125 kVp. Check feedback circuitry. Error Code 5A Hex in the error list. Check FIL FDBK+ and FIL FDBK- on sheet 5 location F 1 of the CPU schematic. Check AMUX1 AMUX2, and AMUX3 signal of the A/D Control port on sheet 5 location E 6 of the CPU schematic. Check connection to the filament/kVp board. Check that the voltage across R188 on the filament/kVp control board is 0.45 to 0.55V. Is the 60Hz inverter running properly? The voltage across AMX1-A4-C6 should be approximately 27 Volts when the 60Hz inverter is turned on. Error Code 5B Hex in the error list. Check 1kHz INVERTER READY signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the connection from the CPU to the 1kHz board. Check that the 60Hz inverter turns on. Check that AMX1-A4-C2 charges to at least 70VDC when the 60Hz inverter is turned on. Check for faulty feedback circuitry. Error Code 5C Hex in the error list. Check FIL SHRT DETECT signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the circuitry associated with this signal. Check R150 on CPU 46232828 or R321 on CPU 46264974. Error Code 5D Hex in the error list.

ERROR 45A Generator Fault

LEAKAGE COMP FDBK was low after the command was output during the prep cycle.

ERROR 45B Generator Fault

FIL FDBK was low after the command was output during the prep cycle.

ERROR 45C Generator Fault

The 1 kHz inverter ready signal was not asserted after the 60 Hz inverter turned on during prep.

ERROR 45D Generator Fault

Filament shorted signal was asserted during the prep cycle.

12-18

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 123 (CONT.) APPLICATIONS ERROR CODES Error Number ERROR 45E Generator Fault Probable Cause Filament shorted signal failed to be asserted when the filament driver was turned on during prep. Because its resistance is low initially (cold), the filament should appear to be shorted for a short while when the inverter is first turned on.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Check FIL SHRT DETECT signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Does the filament inverter turn on? Are the high voltage cables connected correctly? Check the circuitry associated with this signal. Is the filament open? Error Code 5E Hex in the error list. Check FIL SHRT DETECT signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Are the high voltage cables reversed? Is the filament drive sufficient? The small filament should be selected in the high voltage transformer. Check the circuitry associated with this signal. Error Code 5F Hex in the error list. Check X-RAY PRESSURE SW signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the connection from the CPU to the pressure switch. Check for a faulty switch. Check the receiving circuits on the CPU. Did the switch really trip due to high pressure or low pressure? Error Code 60 Hex in the error list. Check 60 HZ INV OK signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the connection from the CPU to the 60Hz inverter. Check for faulty feedback circuitry. Error Code 61 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 45F Generator Fault

Filament shorted signal did not go low after the filament was allowed to heat up during prep. Anode/Cathode cables reversed.

ERROR 460 Generator Fault

Tube Pressure Switch opened during exposure interlock check.

ERROR 461 Generator Fault

The 60 Hz Inverter Ok signal was low during exposure interlock check.

ERROR 462 Generator Fault

Exposure time was excessive according to the programmable interval timer count. The exposure was terminated before mAs timer expired.

Check LOW RESOLUTION signals of the Generator Control 1 port on sheet 6 location B 7 of the CPU schematic. Is the unit properly calibrated? (If the initial kVp is off by more than 8% a recalibration is required.) Is there excessive battery voltage drop during a long exposure? Check battery voltage drop. See Section 14-1. Error Code 62 Hex in the error list. Check connection to the filament/kVp board. Check feedback circuitry. Check drive level from the CPU to the filament board. Should be about 0.069 volts per kVp. Error Code 63 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 463 Generator Fault

The kVp Command Feedback was low during the exposure interlock check.

12-19

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 123 (CONT.) APPLICATIONS ERROR CODES Error Number ERROR 465 Generator Fault Probable Cause Filament Current Command Feedback was low during exposure interlock check. (Only display after 100 occurrences)

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Recommended Action Is there excessive battery voltage drop during a long exposure? Check battery voltage drop. See Section 14-1. Is the unit properly calibrated? (If the initial kVp is off by more than 8% a recalibration is required.) Check the feedback circuitry. Error Code 65 Hex in the error list. Check BU TMR OKAY signal of the On Board Status port on sheet 4 location F 8 of the CPU schematic. Does the XRAY ON signal oscillate when the exposure is terminated. Is there excessive noise in the unit which that trips flip-flop U120A on CPU 46232828 or U95 on CPU 46264974 Are all grounds properly connected in the generator. Error Code 66 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 466 Generator Fault

Hardware back up timer expired. Error 437 will occur during the next prep attempt.

ERROR 467 Generator Fault

Exposure was determined to be short.

Check FREQ FDBK0 signal of the On Board Control port on sheet 5 location B 9 of the CPU schematic. Is the unit properly calibrated? (If the initial kVp is off by more than 8% a recalibration is required.) Is the mA excessively high (i.e. greater than 125 mA)? Check preheat circuitry on CPU board and Fil/kVp board. Error Code 67 Hex in the error list. Check EXP STOP CMND signal of the Generator Control 1 port on sheet location B 7 of the CPU schematic. Does the EXP STOP CMND properly reset: U144B on CPU 46232828 or U140 on CPU 46264974 Check the circuits related to this signal. Error Code 68 Hex in the error list. Check X-RAY ON signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check circuitry related to this circuit. (i.e. does the signal oscillate during the exposure when it should be a solid high?) During Calibration: Does the start command get to the inverter? Does the safety contactor pull in? Is high voltage produced? If so, is the resulting kVp what was selected? Do the correct tap relays pull in? Check kV feedback signal. It should look like the signal from the High Voltage Divider. Error Code 69 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 468 Generator Fault

The Exposure Command Active status signal was high after Exposure Stop Command was given.

ERROR 469 Generator Fault

The X-Ray On status went low during the exposure.

12-20

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 SECTION 13 THEORY 13-1 Powerup Diagnostics

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

The powerup diagnostic firmware is responsible for verifying the integrity of the following major functions/components: D D D D D D D D 13-2 Visual Indication Of Testing As the power up tests are executing, message display indicates the various test numbers. It takes the following form: TEST - xx yyyyyy where xx is the test number from 01 07 and yyyyyy is PASSED if the test passed or FAILED if it did not. There are 8 Light Emitting Diodes on the CPU board which light to indicate which test is being executed. Upon powerup or reset, all LEDs are lit. Once the tests begin to execute, the lit LEDs represent the binary code of the test being executed. Note that test 0, the CPU test, is not indicated on the alpha display, but is represented on the LED s when all are turned off. The prompt TESTING COMPLETE displays upon completion of the testing if a fatal powerup fault was not detected. The 80C31 microcontroller. The program code EPROM checksum. The nonvolatile RAM battery. The RAM external to the microcontroller. The calibration data checksum. The watchdog timer. The programmable timers external to the microcontroller. The A/D converter circuitry and power supplies.

13-3

Power Up Tests Testing is done in a confidence building manner. If a test fails, a failure indication is given. If the failure is fatal, program execution stops. If the test is nonfatal, testing continues after a brief delay while the failure prompt is given. If a test passes, the next powerup test is executed. This sequencing continues until a fatal fault occurs or all the tests of been successfully executed. Control is passed to the Application Code, Calibration Code, or Diagnostics. When the intended operating mode is the application code, nonfatal faults are those faults which do not directly effect the drives. Should a non fatal fault be detected, xray and charging will be inhibited and the message DRIVES ONLY displays when the application mode is entered. This provision is incorporated to allow the unit to be moved to a convenient area for servicing if the drive circuits appear to be functional. In order to access diagnostics, the service switch must be set before the TESTING COMPLETE message finishes displaying. Functional descriptions for each of the powerup tests are given in the following paragraphs. 13-1

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-4 80C31 Microcontroller Tests (test 00)

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Testing the 80C31 Microcontroller involves verifying the functionality of each of the following: D D D D D D CPU registers and timers data transfers arithmetic operations logical operations boolean variable manipulations program branching

This test is FATAL regardless of firmware set or intended operating mode.

13-5

EPROM Checksum Test (test 01) The sum for the first 65535 bytes of program code is calculated and checked to make sure it is equal to the 65536th byte. This test is FATAL regardless of firmware set or intended operating mode.

13-6

Ram Battery Test (test 02) This test checks the integrity of the nonvolatile ram battery. If the ram battery is below 2.0 volts, the first write to ram after power up will not be executed. This fact is used to determine the state of the battery. Note: For CPU Board 46-264974, the second RAM battery is protected by check sum.

13-7

External Ram Test (test 03) The external ram test is nondestructive and involves writing and reading the patterns 00, FF, AA and 55 for each RAM location. In addition, a destructive addressing test is done on the RAM locations not allocated to the nonvolatile database. This test is FATAL regardless of firmware set or intended operating mode.

13-8

Calibration Data Checksum Test (test 04) The checksum for the calibration data is calculated and checked to make sure it is equal to the checksum value stored in nonvolatile memory. This test is nonfatal if the calibration or extended diagnostics modes are to be accessed. It is nonfatal for the application mode only if the handle calibration data checksums are ok.

13-2

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-8-1 Checksum Bypass

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

On occasions, troubleshooting errors that occur during calibration can be more efficient if done in the applications mode. However, unless the unit is totally calibrated it will not allow normal applications operation. This is where the checksum bypass is useful. The following diagram illustrates how this is done: Note: Before proceeding with the checksum bypass, enter calibration made and see which checksums have failed. If for instance, the drive checksum failed, a quick cal might resolve the problem.

POWER OFF POWER ON TEST 00

SERVICE SWITCH MUST BE IN THE RUN POSITION BEFORE POWER IS TURNED ON.

TEST 01

TEST 02

SERVICE SWITCH MUST BE SWITCHED TO THE SERVICE POSITION BEFORE TEST 04 FAILED IS FINISHED DISPLAYING.

TEST 03

TEST 04 - FAILED

TEST 05

TEST 06

SERVICE SWITCH MUST BE SWITCHED TO THE RUN POSITION SOMEWHERE IN THIS TIME FRAME BEFORE TESTING COMPLETE IS FINISHED DISPLAYING.

TEST 07

TESTING COMPLETE

ENTER APPLICATION MODE WITH ALL FUNCTIONS ENABLED

13-3

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-9 Watchdog Timer Test (test 05)

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

The watchdog timer is checked to make sure that when strobed, its output goes high within 100 us, stays high for at least 30 ms and goes low within 75 ms. This test is nonfatal for any intended operating mode. 13-10 Programmable Interval Timer Test (test 06) This test checks the functionality of the 82C54 timers 0 and 2, including the ability to count and to provide the proper strobe on their outputs. This test is nonfatal for any intended operating mode.

13-11

A/D Converter Circuitry Test (test 07) This test checks the functionality of the A/D converter, the sample and hold and the analog multiplexer. In addition, the integrity of the processor +5V supply is verified in this test. This test is nonfatal if the calibration or extended diagnostics modes are to be accessed. It is fatal for the application mode (15V and +24V also tested if dip switch #3 is enabled on CPU Board 46264974, starting with firmware 46302688G1/46302687G1).

13-12

Application Mode The application mode consists of the functions that the hospital personnel typically encounter, i.e. Charging, Driving and Xray.

13-4

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-13 Charge Control

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

13-13-1 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS 46302688G1/46302687G1, 46303272G1/46303273G1 and 46303815G1/46303816G1 Charging can be entered from application code by plugging in the line cord. Illustration 131 shows a typical charge profile.
ILLUSTRATION 131 TYPICAL CHARGING PROFILE PROMS 46302688G1/46302687G1, 46303272G1/46303273G1 AND 46303815G1/46303816G1 (EXCEPT EVERY 20TH CYCLE)
TYPICAL CHARGING PROFILE, (EXCEPT EVERY 20TH CYCLE) BATTERY VOLTAGE & CHARGING CURRENT VS. TIME

BATTERY VOLTAGE

130V 120V 110V CHARGE COMPLETE

BATTERY VOLTAGE

2.25
BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT (AMPS)

2.0A

BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT (AMPS)

1.5A 1.0A 0.5A 0.0A CHARGE COMPLETE

1 2 TIME (HRS)

10

13-5

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Every 20th cycle, a complete charge will occur (see Illustration 132 ).
ILLUSTRATION 132 TYPICAL COMPLETE CHARGE PROFILE PROMS 46302688G1/46302687G1, 46303272G1/46303273G1 AND 46303815G1/46303816G1 (EVERY 20TH CYCLE)
TYPICAL COMPLETE CHARGE PROFILE (EVERY 20TH CYCLE) BATTERY VOLTAGE & CHARGING CURRENT VS. TIME

BATTERY VOLTAGE

130V 120V 110V CHARGE COMPLETE

BATTERY VOLTAGE

2.25
BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT (AMPS)

2.0A

BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT (AMPS)

1.5A 1.0A 0.5A 0.0A

CHARGE COMPLETE

1 2 TIME (HRS)

10

13-6

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-13-2 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS 46316685G1/46316686G1

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Charging can be entered from application code by plugging in the line cord. Illustration 133 shows a typical charge profile.
ILLUSTRATION 133 TYPICAL CHARGING PROFILE PROMS 46316685G1/46316686G1 (EXCEPT EVERY 10TH CYCLE)
TYPICAL CHARGING PROFILE, (EXCEPT EVERY 10TH CYCLE) BATTERY VOLTAGE & CHARGING CURRENT VS. TIME

BATTERY VOLTAGE

130V 120V 110V CHARGE COMPLETE

BATTERY VOLTAGE

2.25
BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT (AMPS)

2.0A

BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT (AMPS)

1.5A 1.0A 0.5A 0.0A CHARGE COMPLETE

1 2 TIME (HRS)

10

13-7

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Every 10th cycle, a complete charge will occur (see Illustration 134).
ILLUSTRATION 134 TYPICAL COMPLETE CHARGE PROFILE PROMS 46316685G1/46316886G1 (EVERY 10TH CYCLE)
TYPICAL COMPLETE CHARGE PROFILE, EVERY 10TH CYCLE) BATTERY VOLTAGE & CHARGING CURRENT VS. TIME

BATTERY VOLTAGE

130V 120V 110V CHARGE COMPLETE

BATTERY VOLTAGE

2.25
BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT (AMPS)

2.0A

BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT (AMPS)

1.5A 1.0A 0.5A 0.0A

CHARGE COMPLETE

1 2 TIME (HRS)

10

13-8

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

13-13-3 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1 or 46329187G2/46329188G2 Charging can be entered from the application mode by plugging in the line cord. The AMX4 charger can be classified as a pseudo constant voltage charger. This is because the charger hardware is actually designed for constant current charging but the firmware strives to maintain a constant voltage by adjusting the charger current output. Illustrations 135 through 138 show various aspects of actual charge profiles. Profiles will vary with state ofcharge, battery condition, etc. Illustrations 135 through 138 show only a small sample of the possible charge scenarios. The intent here is to present the most significant elements of the charging algorithm and how the various charge control DATA BASE parameters would effect charge performance. Even though the details of Illustrations 135 through 138 apply specifically to PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1 or 46329187G2/46329188G2, the concepts presented are valid for all PROM versions. A charge cycle can be either a nonextended (topoff) or an extended cycle. Most cycles will be of the nonextended type as seen in Illustration 135. However, every n+1 times that charge is initiated, the AMX4 charger will automatically attempt an extended charge as shown in Illustration 137. (n = the value of the DATA BASE parameter Trickle Limit). An extended charge is considered valid once 1/2 of the extended time has elapsed. If this condition is not met because the charger is unplugged, the system will continue to initiate extended charges.

13-9

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 135 FOR PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1 OR 46329187G2/46329188G2: TYPICAL NONEXTENDED CHARGING PROFILE FOR SIGNIFICANTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET

TYPICAL NON-EXTENDED CHARGE PROFILE FOR SIGNIFICANTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET (BATTERY VOLTAGE VS. CHARGE CURRENT)

Charge Resistor and Charge DAC (VOL TS)

VOLTAGE ACROSS CHARGE RESISTOR AMX1A3R1 SWITCH TO TRICKLE MODE

CHARGER OFF

CHARGE CURRENT DAC VOLTAGE AMX1A2A1 TP29 TIME FRAMES SEE DESCRIPTION BELOW
C" D"

A"

B"

E"

F"

...

TIME (Hours) Illustration 135 shows a typical nonextended charge profile. About 50% of the usable capacity of the batteries was removed prior to charge. The graph plots battery voltage vs. charge current. Charge current is represented two ways: by the voltage across the charging resistor, and by the voltage out of the charge current demand DAC. Actual current can be calculated by dividing the voltage across AMX1A3R1 by 2.5W. The various charge time frames are as follows: TIME FRAME A: This is the charge startup period. The charge current is increased to the maximum allowable level for the present set of conditions (battery stateofcharge, line voltage, etc.). See Illustration 136 for an expansion of this time frame. TIME FRAME B: This is the current limited period. The level that the charge current is limited to is determined by the DATA BASE parameter Maximum Charging mA. The charger will remain at this level until the battery voltage starts to approach the clamp voltage. NOTE: This time frame will be bypassed for charge cycles which are initiated when the batteries are nearly fully charged. 13-10

Battery Voltage (VOLTS)

BATTERY VOLTAGE

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

TIME FRAME C: This is the clamp anticipation period. During this time frame, the charger decreases the charge current in anticipation of the voltage clamp. Clamp anticipation begins at a voltage 7.0V below the voltage set by the DATA BASE parameter High Charge Clamp Volts. The rate of charge current decrease is a function of the rate of battery voltage increase. Clamp anticipation is incorporated to minimize clamp voltage overshoot. TIME FRAME D: This is the voltage limited period which begins once the voltage set by the value of the DATA BASE parameter High Charge Clamp Volts is exceeded. During this time some ripple will be noticeable on the voltage waveform. This ripple is due to the limited resolution of the digitaltoanalog convertor which controls charge current. The duration of this time period is variable depending on the stateofcharge of the batteries prior to charge as well as over all battery condition. This time frame ends, as does the High Charge Mode, when the charge current drops to the level set by the DATA BASE parameter Start Timed Charge Counts. TIME FRAME E: This is the timed charge period which begins when the switch to Trickle Mode is made. When the charger is in the trickle mode, the resolution of the system increases by a factor of 10. This is the reason for the sudden increase of voltage at AMX1A2A1 TP29 by an order of magnitude. (Note, however, that the voltage across the AMX1A3R1 charging resistor doesnt change appreciably.) During the initial stages of this time period, the battery voltage may increase (as shown in Illustration 131 ). This is because a one count change of the charge DAC does not have the same affect in the trickle mode as in the high charge mode. The firmware decreases the current by one DAC count once every two minutes as long as the voltage remains less than two volts above the clamp level, and once every 15 seconds if the voltage is more than two volts but less than five volts over the clamp. If the battery voltage exceeds the clamp by more than five volts, the firmware will drop the charge current to zero for 15 seconds and then reapply it at a lower level. This period ends when the amount of time equal to the DATA BASE parameter TOP OFF TIME in minutes has elapsed and charge current is brought to zero. TIME FRAME F: This is the CHARGE COMPLETE period. The charger output is zero, the system electronics are powered from the A.C. line, and CHARGE COMPLETE is displayed on the message display. The system will remain in this state until the system is unplugged from its AC outlet. If during this time period the battery voltage falls below the level set by the DATA BASE parameter Monitor Full Capacity Millivolts, the firmware will trip the circuit breaker to conserve charge if the system has been in the CHARGE COMPLETE mode for at least the amount of time specified by the DATA BASE parameter Breaker Trip Time. One of three conditions can cause this to occur. First, the battery set can have one or more shorted cells each decreasing the voltage by approximately 2 volts. Second, the regulator circuit which supplies power to the system electronics may be defective, forcing the battery to supply this power. Finally the breaker might trip if the system is left in the CHARGE COMPLETE mode for many days, because of the batterys own selfdischarge.

13-11

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 136 FOR PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1 OR 46329187G2/46329188G2: TYPICAL CHARGE STARTUP PROFILE FOR SIGNIFICANTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET

TYPICAL CHARGE START-UP PROFILE FOR SIGNIFICANTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET (BATTERY VOLTAGE VS. CHARGE CURRENT)

Charge Resistor and Charge DAC (VOL TS)

BATTERY VOLTAGE

VOLTAGE ACROSS CHARGE RESISTOR AMX1A3R1

CHARGE CURRENT DAC VOLTAGE AMX1A2A1 TP29

TIME (Minutes) Illustration 136 shows in detail what occurs at the beginning of a charge cycle. When the system first senses that the charge cord has been plugged in, it sets the Charge Current DAC to its appropriate level and then closes the charge enable relays (K150 and K187) on the charge board AMX1A3A1. Charge current is maintained at this initial level for approximately 75 seconds to allow for stabilization. The Charge Current DAC output is then increased at a rate of 9 DAC counts per 18 seconds until the maximum current level (set by the DATA BASE parameter Maximum Charging mA) is reached. See Illustration 138 for a case where the charge current does not ramp up to its maximum level.

13-12

Battery Voltage (VOLTS)

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 137 FOR PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1 OR 46329187G2/46329188G2: TYPICAL EXTENDED CHARGING PROFILE FOR A SLIGHTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET

TYPICAL EXTENDED CHARGE PROFILE FOR A SLIGHTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET (BATTERY VOLTAGE VS. CHARGE CURRENT)

BATTERY VOLTAGE

SWITCH TO FLOAT CHARGE CHARGE CURRENT DAC VOLTAGE AMX1A2A1 TP29

SWITCH TO TRICKLE MODE

TIME FRAMES SEE DESCRIPTION BELOW


A" B" C" ...

TIME (Hours) The profile in Illustration 137 shows what occurs when a battery which has been only slightly discharged is recharged. Because the battery quickly becomes resistant to charge, its voltage climbs at a fast rate and generally overshoots the clamp voltage as shown. TIME FRAME A: This is the High Charge Mode. See Illustration 138 for an expansion and detailed description of this time frame. TIME FRAME B: This is the timed charge period which begins when the switch to Trickle Mode is made. For an extended charge this timed charge ends when the amount of time equal to the DATA BASE parameter Final Phase Time in hours has elapsed. The charger maintains the battery voltage at the clamp level by slowly decreasing the current. TIME FRAME C: This is the CHARGE COMPLETE period for an extended charge. The charger enters a float charge condition, and charger output is adjusted to maintain the battery voltage at the level determined by the DATA BASE parameter Trickle Charge Clamp Voltage. This voltage will be maintained until the charge cord is removed from its AC outlet.

13-13

Battery Voltage (VOLTS)

Charge DAC (VOLTS)

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 138 FOR PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1 OR 46329187G2/46329188G2: TYPICAL CHARGE STARTUP PROFILE FOR A SLIGHTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET

TYPICAL CHARGE START-UP PROFILE FOR SLIGHTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET (BATTERY VOLTAGE VS. CHARGE CURRENT)

CHARGE CURRENT DAC VOLTAGE AMX1A2A1 TP29

TIME (Minutes) Illustration 138 shows what occurs when a nearly charged battery is recharged. Charge is initiated as described for Illustration 136, except that the current never reaches its maximum level because current stops increasing when the battery voltage exceeds the clamp voltage minus seven volts (123V in this case). The charger now enters a clamp anticipation phase as indicated by the Time Frame C description for Illustration 135. Once the clamp voltage is exceeded, the charge current decreases at a rate of 1 DAC count every six seconds if the voltage is increasing at a rate greater than 0.2V in six seconds. Otherwise, charge current is decreased at a rate of 1 DAC count every 40 seconds. If the clamp voltage is exceeded by more than 2.00V, the firmware brings the charge current demand to zero for 15 seconds to force the battery voltage to drop before the charge current is reapplied at a level 3 DAC counts lower. If the battery voltage needs to be dropped more than 4 times within a 4 minute window, the charge current is reapplied at a level 10 DAC counts lower.

13-14

Battery Voltage (VOLTS)

BATTERY VOLTAGE

Charge DAC (VOLTS)

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-14 Battery Charge Diagnostics

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

13-14-1 Battery Charger RunTime Diagnostics Checking charge current feedback. The actual feedback must be within 20% of the expected feedback otherwise an error is flagged. Checking to see if the charger is saturated. During the high current charging phase, the charger is assumed to be saturated if the charge current feedback is approximately 6% lower than the expected value. Charger saturation occurs when the charger can not meet the charge current demand. Usually this takes place toward the end of a charge cycle when the battery voltage is high (head voltage is low). When saturation is detected, charge current demand is decreased. 13-14-2 Charging Diagnostics Display (Applies to PROMS 46316685G1/46316686G1 and Later) If the service switch is placed into the service or down position while the system is charging, the current battery voltage and charger current are displayed on the kVp/mAs numeric display. The display takes the formats of Illustration 139.
ILLUSTRATION 139 CHARGING DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY

BATTERY VOLTAGE DISPLAY

CHARGER CURRENT DISPLAY

Note:

The display is only updated once every six seconds and the displayed values lag the actual values because of voltage and current averaging inherent in the AMX4 metering circuits and algorithms. With the battery volt meter and charger properly calibrated, errors up to 1% for the battery voltage and 5% for the charge current are possible.

13-15

Drive

13-15-1 Drive Control The drive mode is entered from application code whenever the drive handle is engaged and is exited when the handle is released. The Drive Control Algorithm converts the drive handle input to a drive command, allowing reverse only if the bumper is engaged. It sends the status of the xray tube parked switch to the drive control board.

13-15

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 1310 DRIVE DAC OUTPUT VS. HANDLE DISPLACEMENT

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

DRIVE DAC OUTPUT VS. HANDLE DISPLACEMENT

(0) 255

DRIVE DAC COMMAND (COUNTS)


(128) 128

DEADBAND

(255) 0 HALL SENSOR OUTPUT @ FULL REVERSE HANDLE DISPLACEMENT HALL SENSOR OUTPUT WITH NO HANDLE DISPLACEMENT HALL SENSOR OUTPUT @ FULL FORWARD HANDLE DISPLACEMENT

From the graph on Illustration 1310 it becomes apparent the any handle input will map the appropriate output drive command. It should be noted that the left and right channels are independent from one another. Drive Control RunTime Diagnostics in the main drive control loop check drive current feedback to see that it is equal to or less than the drive command. Checks for drive stalls and stuck handle are also done. 13-15-2 Drive Diagnostics Using the RunTime Diagnostic Drive Display to Isolate Drive Errors. Firmware includes diagnostics which display drive command and feedback for both left and right drives on the kVp mAs display. The displays are activated any time the service switch is active when the unit is in the drive mode. The displays are activated any time the service switch is active when the unit is in the drive mode. The display format is as follows:
0 1 LEFT OUTPUT 2 3 LEFT FEEDBACK 4 RIGHT OUTPUT 5 6 7

RIGHT FEEDBACK

13-16

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

The displays change very fast but you should be able to notice trends. That is, as the output increases so should the feedback and when the output decreases the feedback should follow. The only time the feedback equals the output is when the drive power amp is not pulse width limited which only occurs when the unit is accelerating from stop and when driving very slowly. Note that the data is displayed in hex and that because of the bipolar operation of the drives a request for no drive corresponds to 80 (HEX) on the display. Keeping this in mind, the feedback should always be on the same side of 80 as the Output command (+ a couple counts). If a drive fault should occur, the firmware locks the fault condition on the display as long as the drive deadman switch is held active. This will allow you to record the display so that you can interpret what it means. The display is especially helpful in isolating blown fuses or bad connections to the drive motors. If either of these conditions were present you would see the feedback remain constant while the output command is very active. Conditions which are detected as faults: 1. Current feedback indicating drive in the opposite direction from what was commanded. 2. Current feedback in excess of what was commanded. 3. Current feedback which doesnt exceed 10% of the output command for at least 100 ms. Remember: For commands above 80H, the larger the number the greater the output com mand. For commands below 80H, the smaller the number the greater the out put command. Also, the output commands displayed are scaled down by 63% from the actual output so that they correspond to the feedback.

13-17

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-15-3 Drive Control Software Theory

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

HOW SOFTWARE CONTROLS THE AMX DRIVE


Note: For the following theory, refer to Section 15, Illustration 15-8, Left & Right Drive Functional Flow". WHAT SOFTWARE WANTS TO SEE FROM THE HALL EFFECT SENSORS: The AMX software looks for certain voltages from the Hall effect sensors in the Drive handle: D The voltages from the Hall effect sensors enter the CPU via analog MUX U342. They can be measured at CPU TP22 (left handle) or TP21 (right handle). They must be as follows, or calibration errors will occur: - With handle at rest, this voltage should be between 3.125 and 7.5 VDC. - Move handle full forward, and voltage should change in either direction by at least .32 Volts, but no more than 5 Volts. Direction is not important since this depends on magnet polarity and is calibrated out. - Move handle full reverse, and voltage should change in other direction by at least .32 Volts, but no more than 5 Volts. The voltage must change in the OTHER direction, or a HANDLE CAL ERR 4 will occur. D Always push full forward and pull full back during calibration. Otherwise, the CPU may see a greater or lesser voltage than expected during applications, and cause a 218 error. During applications, the software looks at the Hall sensor voltage and does some calculations based on data gathered during handle calibration. The calculations convert the approximately 37 Volt Hall signal into a 10 to +10 Volt signal used as the Drive Command to the drive servo. This command is the output from a D/A converter and can be seen on TP19 (left drive) and TP18 (right drive). A 0 Volt command is a command for no motion, while a + or command provides drive in a forward or reverse direction. If there is no voltage change at Test Points 21 or 22, explore the Handle Check signal.

WHAT THE HANDLE CHECK SIGNAL IS FOR: The AMX CPU makes the handle check signal from a D/A output that is normally used for the Charge Current Command. While AMX is driven, it cannot charge, so this D/A performs double duty. D The Handle Check signal is at CPU TP29. This should measure about 10 Volts with a meter. When the drive enable bar is engaged, the signal is actually a square wave that is 10 Volts for 24 mS and 0 Volts for 1 mS. When this signal drops to zero, it forces the signal from the Hall sensor to zero. The signal is continuously 10 Volts when the enable bar is released.

13-18

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 D

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

During driving, the CPU looks for the drop to zero Volts once every 24 ms. During the 24 ms in between, the CPU can get the actual handle command. If this zero Volt drop is missing, there will be a 218 error. This is a safety feature to guarantee that the analog MUX, Sample and Hold, and A/D are working correctly while driving, in order to prevent runaway of the AMX.

WHAT SOFTWARE WANTS TO SEE FROM THE DRIVE FEEDBACK SIGNAL: The CPU expects certain voltages from the drive servos Drive Feedback signal that is input to the CPU at PIN 25 (left drive) and PIN 26 (right drive) of analog MUX U342. D The Drive Command from CPU is a 10 to +10 Volt command with 0 Volts meaning do not drive. The feedback that should be seen from the servo is calculated by the following formula: Feedback Voltage = 5 + ((Drive Command x 0.625) x 0.5) Thus there is a Drive Command that goes above and below 0 Volts which produces a feedback that goes above and below 5 Volts. D The software looks at this feedback whenever the enable bar is picked up. An error occurs if any of the following happens: - The feedback is in opposite direction of what is expected: For example, if command is less than 0, feedback should be less than 5 Volts. If feedback is greater than 5 Volts, this is instantly an error. - The feedback is greater than expected: For example, if the Drive Command is 4 Volts, feedback should be: Feedback Voltage = 5 + ((4 x 0.625) x 0.5) = 6.25 Volts Thus if feedback is greater than 6.25 Volts, there is a 214 or 216 error. - The feedback based upon 10% of command is less than expected for more than 100 ms: For example, using the 4 Volt command above, 10% of 4 is 0.4 Volts, so feed back should be at least: Feedback Voltage = 5 + ((0.4 x 0.625) x 0.5) = 5.125 Volts Thus, if feedback is less than 5.125 volts for more than 100 ms, there is a 215 or 217 error. D Monitor the command and feedback by flipping down the Service Switch while in applications mode. Lifting the enable bar should cause many digits to display on the kV/mA display. (There is a good description of this in Section 13152 of this manual.) Note that the display for the command is scaled by the .625 (63%) factor so that the command and feedback will match.

13-19

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 D

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

The software looks at this feedback as soon as handle is lifted. When not driving, there should be about 5 Volts at PINS 25 and 26 of the MUX. If there isnt about 5 Volts upon picking up the enable bar, there will be a RELEASE HANDLE or 214 thru 217 error. This can be an aid in troubleshooting. If there is an error by just pulling up the enable bar, it means that feedback was never correct, and the problem is probably the CPU or Drive Controller. If handle has to be moved to get error, there is probably a blown fuse or bad Power Amp board. Usually the Power Amp Fails because a FET becomes shorted. This shorted FET will probably destroy a DG201 analog switch on the Drive Controller (U31 or U51), and blow a fuse (F1 or F2 by the drive contactors). Determine if the FETs are shorted by measuring their impedance with an OHM meter. There should be at least 10K OHM between any combination of the case and the 2 leads. These FETs are easy to replace.

Note:

Never replace a drive controller board or a fuse without first checking to make sure that FET's are not shorted. Otherwise, a DG201 or a fuse will blow again! INPUT AND OUTPUT PORTS THAT EFFECT THE DRIVE: The CPU looks at several signals on the U151 Input port and sends out several signals on the U264 Output port. D INPUT PORT U151 - DRIVE ENA SW (PIN 13) is engaged. - TUBE PARKED SW (PIN 18) - BUMPER (PIN 3) thing. When low, it tells CPU that Drive Enable Bar When low, it tells CPU that tube is parked.

When low, it tells CPU that front bumper has hit some

- STALL (PIN 4 OR 7) When low, it tells CPU that Drive Controller senses too much motor current. D OUTPUT PORT U264 - MOTOR ENA (PIN 5) -- When this goes high, it releases the brakes and energizes the drive contactors. (Drive enable bar must also be engaged for brakes and contactor to work.) The software looks for Drive enable bar to be engaged, for no stall, and for no bumper with a forward drive command. - DRIVE RESET (PIN 6) -- This pulses high to reset the stall latches on the Drive Controller board whenever enable bar is pulled up. - FULL SPD ENA (PIN 19) -- When high, it allows full speed. The software looks for tube to be parked, and for front bumper to be released to allow full speed.

13-20

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-16 Generator Control

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

13-16-1 Generator Control Algorithm Following is a sequence of events for a no error xray cycle: 1. Prep switch is pressed. 2. 60Hz inverter is turned off if the field light was on (this prevents electrical noise when the rotor relay is switched in). 3. Check critical status interlocks. 4. Turn on the 60Hz inverter (rotor). 5. Turn on filament inverter and boost the filament. 6. Output kVp DAC command. 7. Output leakage compensation DAC command. 8. Pull in the safety contactor. 9. Determine battery voltage. 10. Turn on the 1kHz inverter. 11. Output the required filament current command. 12. Select the appropriate tap relays. 13. Display READY FOR XRAY 14. Expose switch is pressed. 15. mAs integrator is enabled. 16. Start exposure command is issued. 17. Auto Cal data is collected. 18. Interlocks are continuously checked during the exposure. 19. When the selected mAs is reached on the mAs integrator, the exposure is terminated (the stop command is issued) 20. All DAC outputs are set to 0. 21. The 60Hz, 1kHz and 2kHz Inverters are turned off. 22. Adjust filament current demand database using Auto Cal data. 23. Turn off rotor and tap select relays. 24. Wait for Prep Switch to be released. 13-16-2 Selecting The Proper KVp Demand The correct kVp, demand is determined from the operator selected kVp and calibrated data base values. During kVp calibration, the relationship between 4 kVp demand DAC outputs and the resulting kVp is determined. All kVp demands are then linearly interpolated in between these database entries.

13-21

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-16-3 Selecting The Proper Tap Relay Combination

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

The selected tap relay combination is a function of selected kVp, battery voltage and calibrated tap constants. The tap combination that will yield an average emission current closest to 100mA will be selected.

13-16-4 Selecting The Proper Filament Current Demand The proper filament current is determined using the selected kVp and the calculated emission current resulting from the selected tap relay combination. During filament current calibration the filament current at 90 and 110 mA of emission current is determined for each kVp station and stored in the database. A linear interpolation is done on these database elements using the calculated emission current to arrive at the proper filament current at the selected kVp.

13-16-5 Auto Calibration To compensate for tube aging and to tweak interpolated filament current points, auto calibration is done after all exposures longer than 10ms as follows: D D D Determine how much the filament current needs to be adjusted based on the initial kVp error of the last exposure. Weight the filament current table adjustments based on the mA. Adjust adjacent filament current table points to reflect the change made at the present station.

13-16-6 Generator Control Diagnostics (Fault Detection) During the PREP and EXPOSURE cycles, the firmware continuously checks the status of various interlocks. As a result, there 36 unique errors that can appear. All xray generator related faults are indicated by the message ERROR 4xx, where xx is a unique error code for a particular fault.

13-17

Field Light Control The field light can be turned on any time the unit is not charging or in the xray mode (prep or expose) provided a generator fault has not occurred. The field light is turned on by enabling the 60Hz clocks to the 60Hz inverter. The clocks remain enabled for from 5 to 45 seconds after the field light switch is released. Pressing the field light switch during the 5 to 45 second time period reloads the timer with the calibrated on time. The field light has a maximum total on time of 200 seconds before it is disabled for cooling.

13-22

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-18 Bar Graph Control For Version 46302688G1/46302687G1 Capacity is determined as follows:

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

When Not Driving Or Charging 0% *


NUMBER OF LIGHTED BARS IS A LINEAR RELATION DETERMINED BY THE VOLTAGES BELOW

100% **

112.00V

D MAXIMUM RATE OF DECREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN. D THE BAR GRAPH WILL GAIN SEGMENTS AT A RATE OF 0.6 BARS/MIN IN RESPONSE TO VOLTAGE FLUCTUATION

116.00V OR GREATER

* THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. MAY BE MODIFIED BY BATTERY AGING. **THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE.

When Driving 0% *
NUMBER OF LIGHTED BARS IS A LINEAR RELATION DETERMINED BY THE VOLTAGES BELOW

100% ** 113.00V
OR GREATER

109.00V
*

D Maximum rate of decrease is 3.0 bars/min D The bar graph will not gain segments in this mode THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. THE 0% VOLTAGE IS MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS 3.0V. MAY BE MODIFIED BY BATTERY AGING.

** THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. THE 100% VOLTAGE IS MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS 3.0V.

When Charging 0% *
# BARS LINEAR RELATION USING VOLTAGES BELOW

85% 100% ***

114.00V

D Maximum rate of increase is 3.0 bars/min during the voltage period and 0.011 bars/min during the timed charge period. D The bar graph will not lose segments in this mode. * **

130.00V **

THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS MAY BE CHANGED BY THE BATTERY AGE ALGORITHM. THE 0% VOLTAGE IS EQUAL TO (MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS +2.00V. THIS VALUE IS 130.00V.

*** ALL BARS SHOULD BE LIT SEVERAL MINUTES AFTER CHARGE COMPLETE (EXCEPT IN FULL CHARGE CYCLE WHICH OCCURS EVERY 20TH TIME.

13-23

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-19 Bar Graph Control For Version 46303272G1/46303273G1 or 46303815G1/46303816G1 Capacity is determined as follows: When Not Driving Or Charging 0% *
NUMBER OF LIGHTED BARS IS A LINEAR RELATION DETERMINED BY THE VOLTAGES BELOW

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

100% **

112.00V

D D

MAXIMUM RATE OF DECREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN. THE BAR GRAPH WILL GAIN SEGMENTS AT A RATE OF 0.6 BARS/MIN IN RESPONSE TO VOLTAGE FLUCTUATION

114.00V

THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. MAY BE MODIFIED BY BATTERY AGING.

** THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE.

When Driving 0% *
NUMBER OF LIGHTED BARS IS A LINEAR RELATION DETERMINED BY THE VOLTAGES BELOW

100% ** 111.00V
OR GREATER

109.00V
*

D MAXIMUM RATE OF DECREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN D THE BAR GRAPH WILL NOT GAIN SEGMENTS IN THIS MODE

THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. THE 0% VOLTAGE IS MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS 3.0V. MAY BE MODIFIED BY BATTERY AGING.

** THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. THE 100% VOLTAGE IS MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS 3.0V.

When Charging 0% *
# bars linear relation using voltages below

85% 100% ***

114.00V

MAXIMUM RATE OF INCREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN DURING THE VOLTAGE PERIOD AND 0.011 BARS/MIN DURING THE TIMED CHARGE PERIOD. D THE BAR GRAPH WILL NOT LOSE SEGMENTS IN THIS MODE.

**

130.00V

* **

THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS MAY BE CHANGED BY THE BATTERY AGE ALGORITHM. THE 0% VOLTAGE IS EQUAL TO (MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS +2.00V. THIS VALUE IS 130.00V.

***ALL BARS SHOULD BE LIT SEVERAL MINUTES AFTER CHARGE COMPLETE (EXCEPT IN FULL CHARGE CYCLE WHICH OCCURS EVERY 20TH TIME.

13-24

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-20 Bar Graph Control For Version 46316685G1/46316686G1 Capacity is determined as follows: When Not Driving Or Charging 0% *
NUMBER OF LIGHTED BARS IS A LINEAR RELATION DETERMINED BY THE VOLTAGES BELOW

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

100% **

112.00V

D MAXIMUM RATE OF DECREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN. D THE BAR GRAPH WILL GAIN SEGMENTS AT A RATE OF 0.6 BARS/MIN IN RESPONSE TO VOLTAGE FLUCTUATION

114.00V

* THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. MAY BE MODIFIED BY BATTERY AGING. **THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE.

When Driving 0% *
NUMBER OF LIGHTED BARS IS A LINEAR RELATION DETERMINED BY THE VOLTAGES BELOW

100% ** 111.00V
OR GREATER

109.00V
*

D MAXIMUM RATE OF DECREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN D THE BAR GRAPH WILL NOT GAIN SEGMENTS IN THIS MODE THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. THE 0% VOLTAGE IS MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS 3.0V. MAY BE MODIFIED BY BATTERY AGING.

** THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. THE 100% VOLTAGE IS MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS 3.0V.

When Charging 0% *
# BARS LINEAR RELATION USING VOLTAGES BELOW

85% 100% ***

114.00V

D MAXIMUM RATE OF INCREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN DURING THE VOLTAGE PERIOD AND 0.011 BARS/MIN DURING THE TIMED CHARGE PERIOD. D THE BAR GRAPH WILL NOT LOSE SEGMENTS IN THIS MODE.

**

127.00V

* **

THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS MAY BE CHANGED BY THE BATTERY AGE ALGORITHM. THE 0% VOLTAGE IS EQUAL TO (MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS +2.00V. THIS VALUE IS 127.00V.

***ALL BARS SHOULD BE LIT SEVERAL MINUTES AFTER CHARGE COMPLETE (EXCEPT IN FULL CHARGE CYCLE WHICH OCCURS EVERY 10TH TIME.

13-25

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-21 Battery Aging for Firmware 46316685G1/46316686G1 and Earlier Note:

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

For Firmware 46-329187G1/46-329188G1 46-329187G2/46-329188G2, see Section 13-22-6.

or

The battery aging algorithm may change the monitor_zero_capacity_millivolts to prevent potential error during exposure. This will make the minimum on the bar graph correspond to a voltage higher than 112V. (The normal bargraph range corresponds to 112V min. and 114V max.) The algorithm may be disabled and the range reset to norm by loading defaults, running full calibration, and loading location 19D with 0000. (See the data base access section). 13-22 Bar Graph Control For Version 46329187G1/46329188G1 or 46329187G2/46329188G2 (SMART GAUGE) This section describes the highlevel operation of the battery capacity metering algorithm for the AMX4 mobile rad product. This algorithm shall hereafter be referred to as SMART GAUGE. The SMART GAUGE firmware divorces the bar graph display from battery voltage and instead uses actual usage to approximate remaining capacity. This has the effect of normalizing all battery sets regardless of manufacturer or manufacturing date. It also allows the system to be relatively insensitive to bad cells as long as performance is still there. 13-22-1 Discharge Loads When the AMX4 is ON, there are five distinct loads on the battery. They are idle, drive, field light, prep, and xray exposures. All load currents except for drive are relatively constant and can be integrated easily over time. To be conservative, the drive load is considered to be constant at a level equivalent to driving at top speed on a flat level surface. Note: The additional load of the optional AEC module on the battery set is approxi mately 5 mA. Since this value is so small, no special compensation is made for this case. Available capacity in milliamp hours is decreased from its present level as described by the follow equation: remaining capacity = remaining capacity idle energy removed since last sample drive energy removed since last sample field light energy removed since last sample prep energy removed since last sample xray energy removed since last sample

13-26

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

The various energy removed values (in milliamp seconds) will be determined from elapsed time as follows:
ENERGY REMOVED idle energy removed drive energy removed field light energy removed prep energy removed ELAPSED TIME = {[Elapsed idle time] = {[Elapsed drive time] = {[Elapsed field light time] = {[Elapsed xray mode time] NOMINAL LOAD[

 300 (mA)}  3000 (mA)}  2500(mA)}  3000(mA)}

Exposure energy removed (in mA seconds) will be determined from exposure data as follows:
x-ray energy removed = {[Cumulative Exposure Energy since last sample (Joules)]  (conversion factor) where, conversion factor =(1000 mA/A) [ 0.75 (generator eff.)100V (typ. loaded volts) ] = 13
[

These nominal loads are adjustable via DATA BASE parameters. The load to DATA BASE names are crossreferenced below: NOMINAL LOAD idle drive field light prep DATA BASE PARAMETER Idle Load Current Drive Load Current Field Light Load Current Prep Load Current

The remaining capacity calculations are done each time a new battery voltage value is calculated which is approximately every five seconds. The % capacity remaining is then displayed on the 48 segment bargraph. The bargraph has the relationship of each segment representing: Total Capacity (a DATA BASE parameter) 48 segments Using the default conditions as an example we get: 6500 mASHR/48 seg = 135 mASHR per segment. Given this default condition, each of the various load modes will remove capacity at different rates as follows:
LOAD MODE Idle Drive Field Light XRay Prep Xray LOAD MAGNITUDE 0.3 amps 3.0 amps 2.5 amps 3.0 amps BASED ON TECHNIQUE DISCHARGE RATE 2.2 segments/hour 0.4 segments/minute 0.3 segments/minute 0.4 segments/minute 0.0005 to 0.8 segments/exposure TYPICAL DAILY USAGE* 0.8 AHR = 6 segments 1.7 AHR = 13 segments 0.4 AHR = 3 segments 0.1 AHR = 1 segment 0.07 AHR = 0 segments 23 segments (48%)

TOTAL DAILY SEGMENTS TURNED OFF: *Based on actual field data.

13-27

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-22-2 Emergency Capacity

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

In order to deal with the rare situation where a customer is nearly finished with a patient exam when capacity goes to 0 preventing further exposures, an emergency capacity feature is added. Upon powerup, if 0% capacity is detected, three bar segments will be lit. Thus cycling the keyswitch will give approximately 50 seconds before the bar graph display goes to 0% again, allowing enough time to position a patient, to illuminate the field light, and to take an exposure. 13-22-3 Recharge Phases During charge, available capacity will be increased in three phases. Phase I is the current limited phase, Phase II is the voltage limited phase, and Phase III is the timed voltage limited phase. The following paragraphs describe the rules governing the bar graph update. PHASE I (Current Limit) This phase occurs at the beginning of a charge cycle when the charger is putting out its maximum current and the voltage has not reached its maximum value. During this time, 50% of the segments unlit at the beginning of charge will be illuminated. Concurrently, the capacity remaining variable will be increased by 50%.
SEGMENTS AT START OF CHARGE + 50% OF UNLIT SEGMENTS AT START OF CHARGE

PRESENT NUMBER OF SEGMENTS

SEGMENTS AT START OF CHARGE

Voltage at end of Current RampUp

Present Voltage

Maximum Phase I Voltage (127V)

There are several exceptions to the above relationship: 1. This phase may be skipped when attempting to charge fully charged batteries or batteries which are resistant to charge. This occurs when the charging current is more than 20 DAC counts below maximum at the end of the charge rampup. 2. The maximum % change is limited to 10% per volt of difference between the beginning and ending Phase 1 voltages. As an example, if the voltage at the end of the current rampup is 123V, the maximum % change will be limited to 40% [(127V124V)10%]. 3. If the clamp anticipation algorithm decreases the charge current by more than 20 DAC counts, phase 1 will end.

13-28

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 PHASE II (Voltage Limit)

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

As the charge clamp voltage is approached or once it is exceeded, charge current is decreased to keep the battery charge voltage at the programmed limit. 50% of the segments unlit at the beginning of PHASE II will be lit during this phase. This phase is complete when the switch to trickle mode is made. Segments will be lit as a function of the present Charge DAC count as shown in the following graph.
SEGMENTS AT START OF PHASE II + 50% OF UNLIT SEGMENTS AT START OF PHASE II

PRESENT NUMBER OF SEGMENTS

SEGMENTS AT START OF PHASE II

DAC Count at Start of Phase II (typ. 130 counts)

Current DAC Value

Switch to Trickle Mode DAC Value (typ. 26 counts)

There is one exception to the above relationship. If charging batteries which are fully charged, Phase I will be bypassed and the starting Phase II charge DAC count will be very low. In this case, the maximum % change in capacity is limited to 0.7% per DAC count. As an example, if the DAC count at the start of Phase II is 76 and the Switch to trickle mode DAC count is 26, % change in capacity for Phase II will be 35%. Note that for nearly charged batteries and for batteries resistant to charge, this phase may be very short. PHASE III (Timed Charge) After the switch to the trickle mode has been made, the remaining charge is a function of time. When CHARGE COMPLETE is displayed, all bar segments will have been lit. The timed phase can be a topoff or an extended charge; the relationship is the same. Available capacity will be increased as shown in the following graph.
ALL SEGMENTS

PRESENT NUMBER OF SEGMENTS

SEGMENTS AT START OF PHASE III

Timer Value at Start of Timed Phase

Current Timer Value

Timer = 0

13-29

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 StuckAtFull Feature

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

When the charge cycle reaches CHARGE COMPLETE, an additional amount of capacity will be added to the remaining capacity. This results in the automotive equivalent of having the fuel gauge stuckatfull after filling up the fuel tank. The amount of overcharge is defaulted to 500mASHR. The amount of overcharge is controlled by the DATA BASE parameter Full Charge Excess Capacity. The segments on the bar graph display will be at full until this overcharge is used up during discharge.
ILLUSTRATION 1311 FOR PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1 OR 46329187G2/46329188G2: REMAINING CAPACITY AND PERCENT CHARGE DURING RECHARGE (PICTORIAL)
BAR GRAPH PRIOR TO CHARGING

CASE 1
Remaining Capacity = 5700mASHR

CASE 2

REMAINING CAPACITY = 0300MASHR

BAR GRAPH AT END OF PHASE I / BEGINNING PHASE II

CASE 1

CASE 2

REMAINING CAPACITY = 5700MASHR

REMAINING CAPACITY = 3400MASHR

BAR GRAPH AT END OF PHASE II / BEGINNING PHASE III

CASE 1

CASE 2

REMAINING CAPACITY = 6100MASHR

REMAINING CAPACITY = 5000MASHR

BAR GRAPH AT END OF PHASE III CHARGE COMPLETE

CASE 1
REMAINING CAPACITY = 7000MASHR

CASE 2
REMAINING CAPACITY = 7000MASHR

The above CASE 1 and CASE 2 figures illustrate the three phase recharge concept. CASE 1 is an example of a nearly charged battery set (Phase I adds no bar segments) while CASE 2 is an example of a heavily discharged battery set. The equivalent capacity in mASHR is given immediately beneath the bar graph depiction. Default values are assumed.

13-30

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 1312 FOR PROMS 46329187G1/46329188G1 OR 46329187G2/46329188G2: REMAINING CAPACITY AND PERCENT CHARGE DURING RECHARGE (GRAPHICAL)

Typical Non-Extended Charge Profile For Significantly Discharged Battery Set (Battery Voltage vs. Remaining Capacity and % Charge Displayed)

Charge Percent Displayed (in %) & Capacity Remaining (in 100's of Milliampere Hours)

CHARGE COMPLETE FULL CHARGE EXCESS CAPACITY IS ADDED AT CHARGE COMPLETE % CHARGE ON BAR GRAPH DISPLAY

CAPACITY REMAINING IN 100S OF MILLIAMPSHOURS

PHASE I

PHASE II

PHASE III

TIME (Hours) Illustration 1312 demonstrates how both the % charge displayed on the bar graph capacity gauge and the capacity remaining, increase during charge when starting with a significantly discharged battery set. Note that neither parameter is increased until after the initial ramp up period.

13-31

Battery Voltage (VOLTS)

BATTERY VOLTAGE

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-22-4 Voltage Compensation

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

To guard against unusual usage, a circuit defect, or shorted battery cells, all of which may cause a deviation from the current load model, voltage compensation is incorporated in the SMART GAUGE algorithm. To accomplish this, the energy removed during each cycle will be multiplied by a compensation factor as shown in the following table:
VOLTAGE RANGE FOR WHICH ... CONDITION IDLE DRIVE FIELD LIGHT DRIVE and FIELD LIGHT ... Compensation Factor = 1 > 112.0V > 110.5V > 111.0V > 109.5V ... Compensation Factor = 2 > 111.0V and < 112.0V > 109.5V and < 110.5V > 110.0V and < 111.0V > 108.5V and < 109.5V ... Compensation Factor = 3 < 111.0V < 109.5V < 110.0V < 108.5V

The table above assumes the default condition of 11200 (2BC0 Hex) for the DATA BASE parameter Nominal 0% capacity Millivolts which represents 112.00V. The important item to note is that even with voltage compensation in effect, the bar graph (% capacity) response will still be linear with usage. The bar graph will not fall off sharply as had been the case with the previous capacity algorithm. 13-22-5 Diagnostic Aids As shown in the following table, certain DAC voltage outputs are provided to aid manufacturing, field service, and systems evaluation engineering in monitoring the parameters which drive the % capacity display with external measurement equipment.
Quantity To Be Output Present Voltage Remaining Capacity Bar Graph Percentage Quantity to Output Linear Relationship 110V = 0V output 140V = 10V output 0mASHR = 0V output 10000mASHR = 10V output 0% = 0V output 100% = 10V output DAC Name KVP DEMAND FIL CUR DEMAND LEAKAGE COMP DEMAND AMX1A2A1 Test Point # TP26 TP27 TP28

These diagnostic outputs will be available except in the xray mode when the DACs are used for their intended purposes. The Charge Profile illustration in this section was generated by monitoring these test points during charge. 13-22-6 Battery Aging To guard against the adverse effects of aging batteries on high voltage generator performance, a battery aging algorithm is incorporated to reduce the capacity available over the range of the bar graph display as described in Section 13-22-1. If battery aging is effecting the system high voltage performance, the DATA BASE parameter Battery Aging Capacity Offset will begin to increase. It is limited to 70% of the value of the DATA BASE parameter Total Capacity. Relatively new battery sets may also activate this algorithm if a shorted cell(s) is present.

13-32

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

If a customer begins to complain about Capacity Problems, an inspection of the Battery Aging Capacity Offset DATA BASE parameter should be made using DATA BASE ACCESS to see if the algorithm has been activated. Note: This feature can be disabled by writing 0000 to the Battery Aging Disable DATA BASE parameter. IMPORTANT: Loading Defaults in the calibration mode does not zero the Battery Aging Capacity Offset" DATA BASE parameter, because batteries are not always replaced prior to Re-Calibrating a system. Therefore always inspect and zero this parameter any time battery sets or individual batteries are replaced.

13-23

Heat Storage Tube Protection The new application firmware simulates the actual target temperature. It does not generate a heat wait after each exposure like the previous firmware. It only generates a heat wait for heat storage technique selection greater than the track on bulk limits.

13-24

Service Mode This mode of operation is intended to be used only by a service person. It can only be entered only with the use of the service switch. The service mode consists of three functions: calibration, extended diagnostics and data base access. These functions are described below.

13-25

Calibration To enter the calibration mode, the unit must be poweredup with the service switch in the service mode position. Once powerup testing is complete, the CALIBRATE SYSTEM function must be selected. At this point the following items can be calibrated.

13-25-1 Drive Handle Calibration The Handle Is The Only Portion Of The Drive system that requires calibration. The calibration is basically in two parts. First the no force transducer output is determined. Next the transducer output at full forward and full reverse handle displacement is determined for both the left and right channels. From these the magnet polarity and input gains can be determined. 13-25-2 Battery Charger Calibration During charger calibration, the AMX4 learns the relationship between the charge current command and the charge current feedback both for high charge and trickle charge. To do this the AMX 4 calibration firmware outputs two different charge commands and saves the charge current feedback for these points in the data base. From these values in the data base, the expected feedback at any charge command can be interpolated. The AMX 4 also learns the relationship between charge current command and actual charging current. The serviceperson is involved in this step since he enters the voltage across the charging current limit resistor. The value which is saved in the data base is: value = 2.5 ohms entered voltage  1000 The actual charging current is determined at two charge commands. This allows the actual charging current to be interpolated for any charge command.

13-33

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-25-3 Battery Voltmeter Calibration

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

During this calibration step, the AMX 4 learns the relationship between actual battery voltage and the frequency of the VCO which monitors battery voltage. To do this, the AMX 4 counts battery voltage pulses for 5 seconds and then prompts the operator to enter the actual battery voltage. From this information a countspervolt ratio can be determined and stored in the data base.

13-25-4 Generator Calibration This calibration step is divided into four parts as shown below. It is assumed that the battery voltage calibration has been done properly. 13-25-5 mAs Calibration The Illustration 1313 shows the mAs calibration circuitry. During mAs calibration approximately 100 mA is injected into the mA metering circuitry which is based on a Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO). The resulting frequency clocks the counter for a set period of time (3 seconds). As a result, the number of VCO pulses per mAs is given by: counts per mAs = counter contents (injected mA)  (3 sec) 13-25-6 kVp Calibration This calibration step calibrates the AMX 4 to the particular bleeder/meter combination being used for measurement. During this step the AMX 4 learns the relationship between kVp demand and actual kVp. The service person monitors the kVp on an oscilloscope and enters the kVp value when the AMX 4 requests it. Calibration is done at 4 points 52, 64, 85 and 120 kVp
ILLUSTRATION 1313 MAS CALIBRATION CIRCUIT

+V

100 mA

mA

l emiss
P R O C E S S O R

VCO

16 BIT COUNTER

13-34

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 13-25-7 Tap Relay Calibration

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

This is the longest calibration step, but it is fully automated. All the service person is required to do is hold down the prep and expose switches. The purpose of Tap Calibration is to define the system characteristics of as many of the 28 valid tap combinations as possible. Starting at no taps selected, the AMX 4 determines which two kVps yield emission currents of 90 and 110 mA for each tap combination. The Illustration 1314 shows the information that is gathered from this cal. For each tap combination two parameters are stored in the data base; the System Resistance which is the slope of the tap combination load line, and the Effective Turns Ratio which is the yintercept (kVp at 0mA) divided by the battery voltage. 13-25-8 Filament Current (Xray Tube Characteristics) Calibration Filament current demand is calibrated at four kVp station: 52, 64, 85 and 120 kVp. For each kVp station two tap combinations are used the ones that will yield emission currents closest to 90mA and 110mA. Linear interpolation is used to determine the filament current demand values at 90 and 110 mA for each kVp station. These eight calibrated points are then used to interpolate the remaining filament current table entries in the data base as shown in Table 131.
ILLUSTRATION 1314 KVP VERSUS MA

EMISSION CURRENT (mA)

K5, K3, K2, K1 K5, K3, K2

kVp

K5, K3, K1

K2, K1

K2

NO TAPS OPEN 90 110

K1

13-35

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


TABLE 131 FILAMENT CURRENT TABLE ENTRIES 90 mA extrapolated calibrated interpolated interpolated calibrated interpolated interpolated calibrated interpolated interpolated calibrated extrapolated 100 mA extrapolated calibrated interpolated interpolated calibrated interpolated interpolated calibrated interpolated interpolated calibrated extrapolated

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

kVp 50 52 54 62 64 66 80 85 90 115 120 125

Obtaining the correct filament current demand at each of the eight calibration points is done as follows: 1. The filament current used for the first exposure at a new calibration point is based on data collected during tap calibration. 2. When an exposure is taken, the filament current feedback error (indicative of kVp error) is integrated. This integrated error and its polarity determines how much the filament current must be adjusted. 3. If the integrated error is greater than the maximum allowable error then take another exposure with the new filament current of step 2 above. 4. Repeat steps 2 & 3 until the error is within limits. 13-25-9 Field Light On Time Calibration This calibration step allows the field light ON time to be calibrated. Valid times are anywhere from 5 to 45 seconds.

13-26

Extended Diagnostics And Service Tools This portion of the service mode is intended to assist the service representative in trouble shooting. It is password protected to prevent unauthorized access to these tests.

13-27

Data Log Access This portion of the service mode allows access to the history of the unit. It is password protected to prevent unauthorized access.

13-28

Data Base Access This portion of the service mode allows the service representative to view and change data base elements. It is password protected to prevent unauthorized access.

13-36

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 SECTION 14 TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS AND SERVICE AIDS 14-1 Isolating Battery Problems

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

Battery problems manifest themselves in a multitude of manners. Some potential symptoms are: 1. Error 465 may appear during longer exposures (>50 ms). This error occurs when the battery voltage drop during an exposure is significantly greater than what it was during TAP CAL. New firmware versions don't display E-465 until after 100 occurrences. They are logged, however, so inspecting the data log on a regular basis is recommended. 2. Error 462 (excessive exposure time) may also indicate that the battery voltage drop during an exposure is significantly greater than what it was during TAP CAL. 3. The message BATTERY TOO LOW" RECHARGE REQUIRED" may ap pear even though there is significant capacity left according to the bar graph. 4. The circuit breaker may blow or the AMX4 may reset itself. This may occur if the voltage drops below 80V during exposure. Important: Presence of one of the above symptoms does not justify replacing the batter ies. The state-of-health" of the batteries must first be determined. See be low.

14-1-1 Voltage Drop Under Load The only reliable method for determining whether a battery set is bad is to monitor the battery voltage under load at a lower stateofcharge. The procedure follows. 1. Bring the open circuit battery voltage on the set to between 112V and 113.00V unloaded. Drive the unit, use a lamp or some other type of load such as Service Tool 46-302882 (110 Volt/1200 Watt AMX-4 Load Fixture) 2. Monitor the battery voltage from the circuit breaker to the ground stud with a storage scope. Use 5 or 10V/div and 5 ms/div with negative edge trigger. 3. Take a 125 kVp 4 mAs exposure, getting the scope to trigger on the falling edge of the battery voltage. 4. Note the average drop from the PREP load voltage to the voltage during expo sure. See Illustration 35, Voltage Drop Under Load.

14-1

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 141 VOLTAGE DROP UNDER LOAD

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

PREP LOAD VOLTAGE AVERAGE DROP

If the average drop is greater than 17 volts the batteries as a set are bad.

14-2

CPU Dip Switch Positions


PORT ADDR & BIT #
1100H BIT 6 1100H BIT 5 1000H BIT 2 1000H BIT 1 1400H BIT 2 OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = ENGLISH ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = FRENCH OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = CYCLE CPU AT POWER UP (SEE NOTE 1 BELOW) ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = NORMAL RUN MODE OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = ENABLES +24, +15 TESTS ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = DISABLES +24, +15 TESTS OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = 375K BAUD RATE ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = 187.5K BAUD RATE

SW NORMAL # POSITiON
1 2 3 OFF OFF OFF

SW NAME
OPT SW 1 BAUD RATE OPT SW 4 OPT SW 3 OPT SW 2

FUNCTION
(NONE) (NONE) ENABLES POWER SUPPLY TESTS SELECTS BAUD RATE (NOT USED)

COMMENTS

OFF

ON

OFFENG ONFREN ON

SELECTS LANGUAGE OF MESSAGE CYCLES CPU

OFF

(NONE)

NOTE 1: Applicable ONLY to CPU board 46-264974, AND ONLY with PROMS 46-303815G1/46-303816G1 and later. This function enables the CPU board to be recycled in the diagnostic mode by setting switch #7 OFF, placing service mode switch down, and rebooting.

14-2

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 14-3 Generator Cal

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

The following three subsections will help with common problems which may occur during generator calibration. 14-3-1 Tube Spits During CALIBRATE TAPS If you run into tube spits at high kVps during Tap Cal, try slowing the pace of the calibration once the kVp is greater than 125 kVp. That is, wait approximately 30 seconds between exposures and keep the unit in prep longer by allowing the message READY FOR X RAY to be displayed for 5 seconds before pressing the expose switch. 14-3-2 Xray Word Limit During CAL FIL CUR TBL If an XRAY WORD LIMIT occurs during CAL FIL CUR TBL you can prevent the unit from forcing a recalibration of the entire unit by doing the following: 1. With XRAY WORD LIMIT still on the display press mAs Y until you get to the CALIBRATE GENERATOR level. (DO NOT TURN OFF POWER OR PUSH THE RESET SWITCH!) 2. Press mAs B twice and redo the mAs calibration. This updates the appropriate checksums and prevents a forced recalibration of the active generator. 3. Redo CAL FIL CUR TBL. 14-3-3 Triggering The Oscilloscope Prior to CALIBRATE kVp You can save time by making sure your oscilloscope triggers properly prior to entering CALIBRATE kVp. If the unit fails PowerUp Test 04, you can use the checksum by pass feature to enter the application mode and take exposures. Use 50 kVp at 2 mAs to establish your trigger.

14-3

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 14-4 Synchronizing Internal Capacity Meter to Capacity Displayed (Firmware 46329187G1 and 46329188G1 or 46329187G2 and 46329188G2 ONLY)

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

It is possible when servicing the AMX4 to throw the internal capacity meter and the capacity displayed outofsync. This can occur if the batteries are discharged a considerable amount, say with the battery load fixture, followed by a volt meter calibration. If the AMX4 is then put in the application mode, the %capacity displayed will be low while the internal capacity meter may still be quite high. Given this situation, it may take some time for the internal capacity meter to catchup with the % capacity displayed. The reverse can happen if the batteries are charged outside of the application mode (or a new battery set is installed), followed by a volt meter calibration. In this case the unit may exhibit rapid bar graph fall off, while the % capacity displayed catches up with the internal capacity meter which hasnt changed since the last time application mode was active. There are two remedies for these situations. 1. Charge the unit to CHARGE COMPLETE. This approach updates both the internal capacity meter and the % displayed and will eventually synchronize the two. 2. Using the LOOP TEST diagnostic tool, write FF into location 0CB4. This approach corrupts the internal capacity meter forcing a synchronization of internal capacity to % capacity the next time the system is powered up in the applications mode. Note: The displays will be blank for about 5 seconds while this synchronization takes place.

14-4

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 SECTION 15 BLOCK DIAGRAMS 15-1 Illustration Listing Illustration 15-1. Illustration 15-2. Illustration 15-3. Illustration 15-4. Illustration 15-5. Illustration 15-6. Illustration 15-7. Illustration 15-8. Illustration 15-9. X-Ray Enable Control

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

X-ray Enable Preparation And Expose Sequence High Voltage Generation Filament And mAs Control Rotor Control Left Drive Signal Flow Right Drive Signal Flow Left & Right Drive Functional Flow Battery Power and Charging with Charger Board 46-288034 or 46-288786 Cycle Cycle with with Charger Charger Board Board

Illustration 15-10. Battery Power Charge 46-288034 or 46-288786 Illustration 15-11. Battery Power Discharge 46-288034 or 46-288786

15-1

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

15-2

ssssss

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 151 XRAY ENABLE CONTROL
GEN CNTRL 2 1000H SEE ILL. 15-2 FOR X-RAY ENABLE, PREP SEQUENCE & EXPOSE SEQUENCE FLOW CHARTS GEN CNTRL 1 1200H PROG TIMER 1500H GEN CNTRL 2 1000H PREP SW EXP SW J8 23 25 PREP SW EXP SW EXP BACKUP TIMER 1300H PREP SW EXP SW BU TMR OKAY X-RAY PRES SW AEC EXP EN EXP STOP* N O T N O T A N D EXP START O R 1 kHz EN TMR 0 DRIVERS A N D

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

AMX1 A2 A1 CONTROLLER

J3

9 11

ROTOR SELECT* 60HZ INV RELAY*

J1 9 11

AMX1 A3 A2 ROTOR CONTROL


SEE ILL. 15-5 ROTOR CONTROL

60 Hz EN TMR 2 DRIVERS 60HZ PHASE 1/ 60HZ PHASE 2 60HZ INVERTER +24V 10 12 SAFETY CONT ENB* PREP SW 10 12 J4 8 SEE ILL. 15-3 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION SAFETY CONTACTOR J1 5 60HZ INV OK 3 ROTOR INTLK K37 CURRENT DETECT ROTOR DRIVE

15

13

15

13

ROTOR DRIVE

HAND SWITCH
AEC EXP EN J7 9

AMX1 A4 A1 1 kHz INVERTER


START SCR HI/LO 11 13

+BATT

AMX1 A4 HV MODULE
SAFETY CONTACTOR 2 SCR 1 SCR STOP SCR AUTO XFMR

AMX1 A6 A1 HV XFMR

AEC EXP EN 8031 MICROCONTROLLER CRITICAL STATUS 090H P1.0 P1.1 P1.2 P1.4 P1.3

J4

25

EXP START CMND

25

J1

START PULSE GEN

J4

23

EXP STOP CMND

23

X-RAY PRES SW ROTOR INTLK 60HZ INV OK FIL SHORTED

6 3 5 25

J3

GEN CNTRL 1 1200H PROG TIMER 1500H GEN CNTRL 2 1000H P1.5

STOP PULSE GEN

STOP SCR HI/LO 7 9

START SCR -BATT

PRIMARY VOLTS+/ PRIMARY VOLTS-

26

24

1 kHz PHASE 1/ 1 kHz PHASE 2 TAP SELECTS

26

24

1KHZ INVERTER J5 OPTO ISO'S

1/ 2 (HV DRIVE) COIL SELECTS STOP CAP

COM CAP + -

HV XFMR & HV RECTIFIER

L C S

ANODE

X-RAY TUBE

+24V

J5 X-RAY ON

P1.6 P1.7

12

1 kHz INVERTER READY KV FDBK +/-

12 J3

DETECT -70VDC RECTIFIER

J4

X-RAY PRES SW 60HZ INV OK ROTOR INTLK

16

J6

PRIMARY VOLTS+/ PRIMARY VOLTS-

X-RAY ON J5 21 J1 MUX

INT1

MAS SEE ILL. 15-9 BATTERY POWER / CHARGING

SEE ILL. 15-4 FILAMENT / mAs CONTROL

BAT V & CHARGING CUR 5 PWR DOWN RST*

PULSE COUNTER T1

LEAK CMP DAC 1481H KVP DMN DAC 1584H FIL DMN DAC 1580H

J5 3 4

LEAKAGE COMP +/-

3 1

4 2 12

J2 J7 J2 S U M DETECT KV 75% OF DEMAND

AMX1 A4 A2 FIL / KVP CONTROL


SUM

MA+ / MA-

11

12

KVP DMN +/-

11

PWR OK

10

J8 ON-BOARD CNTRL 1280H CHGR & DRV STATUS 1000H

FIL DMN +/2 kHz PHASE 1/ 2 kHz PHASE 2

FILAMENT DRIVE 2KHZ INVERTER VOLTAGE -TOFREQ CONVERT J2 22 21 MAS 25 FIL SHORTED X-RAY ON LAMP* 60HZ INV OK ROTOR INTLK SHORT DETECT

FILAMENT XFMR

L C S CATHODE

LINE SENSE SEE ILL. 15-6 OR 15-7 VEHICLE DRIVE TUBE PARKED SW

6 13

J1

PROG TIMER 1500H GEN CNTRL 1 1200H

TMR 0

DRIVERS

17

19

17

19 5-7 MS DELAY

J8

2 kHz EN PREHEAT 26 PREHEAT 26

X-RAY ON

22

J5 DRIVERS

J6

15 9

SONALERT* X-RAY ON LAMP*

15 9

J1

AMX1 A1 A1 DISPLAY CONTROLLER


LS85 SONALERT J2 17

X-RAY ON

AMX1 A1 A2 DISPLAY
J1 17 DS30 XRAY ON

15-3

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

15-4

ssssss

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 152 XRAY ENABLE PREPARATION AND EXPOSE SEQUENCE

1 ENABLE X-RAY MODE

2 PREP SEQUENCE
PREP SEQUENCE

3 EXPOSE SEQUENCE
EXP SEQUENCE

START

PREP SW PRESSED & TUBE NOT PARKED (FROM ENABLE X-RAY MODE)

EXPOSE SW PRESSED

ARE X-RAYS INHIBITED? X-RAYS INHIBITED IF: BAT V < 112 VDC BACKUP TIMER EXPIRED ON LAST EXPOSURE UNIT NOT CALIBRATED LINE SENSE DETECTED ON POWER-UP PREP OR EXPOSE SWITCH DETECTED ON POWER-UP X-RAYS NOT INHIBITED IS HEAT WAIT REQUIRED? NO IS PREP SW PRESSED? YES IS TUBE PARKED? NO YES NO YES X-RAYS INHIBITED

CHECK INTERLOCKS: VERIFY DATA BASE CHECKSUM MAKE SURE THE FOLLOWING CRITICAL STATUS SIGNALS ARE OK: - X-RAY PRES SW - 60HZ INV OK - ROTOR INTLK - 1 kHz INVERTER READY - FIL SHORTED - X-RAY ON VERIFY THAT NO HV AUTO XFMR RELAY TAPS ARE SELECTED VERIFY BACKUP TIMER STATUS

ASSERT EXP START CMND

EXPOSURE BEGINS. FIL/KVP CONTROL BOARD DETECTS HV AND ASSERTS X-RAY ON. X-RAY ON KICKS OFF THE FOLLOWING EVENTS: STARTS BACKUP TIMER TRIGGERS 8031 uC INT1, STARTING MAS PULSE COUNTER SOUNDS SONALERT LIGHTS X-RAY ON LAMP

AMX1 A1 A2 DISPLAY
HEAT WAIT

START ROTOR BY ASSERTING THE FOLLOWING SIGNALS: ROTOR SELECT* 60HZ INV RELAY* 60 Hz EN

8031 uC COLLECTS AUTO CAL DATA (SEE 2-2-1, FILAMENT / mAs CONTROL)

BOOST FILAMENT BY ASSERTING THE FOLLOWING SIGNALS:

8031 uC CONTINUOUSLY CHECKS INTERLOCKS

AMX1 A1 A2 DISPLAY
TUBE PARKED

PREHEAT 2 kHz EN

WHEN MAS PULSE COUNT = OPERATOR'S mAs INPUT , 8031 uC ASSERTS EXP STOP CMND. EXPOSURE STOPS.

OUTPUT KVP DMN VALUE BASED ON OPERATOR'S kVp INPUT

GO TO PREP SEQ

OUTPUT LEAKAGE COMP VALUE AS CALCULATED FROM DATA BASE

TURN OFF 1KHZ & 2KHZ INVERTERS

UPDATE FIL DMN DATA BASE USING AUTO CAL INFO

OUTPUT FIL DMN VALUE BASED ON: OPERATOR'S kVp INPUT SAMPLED BAT V LEVEL AUTO CAL DATA BASE TURN OFF ROTOR & HV AUTO XFMR RELAY TAPS

PREPARE FOR HIGH VOLTAGE: ASSERT SAFETY CONT ENB SELECT HV AUTO XFMR RELAY TAPS ASSERT 1 kHz EN LOAD EXP BACKUP TIMER INITIALIZE MAS PULSE COUNTER

WAIT FOR RELEASE OF PREP SWITCH

EXIT

AMX1 A1 A2 DISPLAY
READY FOR X-RAY

GO TO EXP SEQ

15-5

ssssss

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

15-6

ssssss

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 153 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION
SEE ILL. 15-9 BATTERY POWER / CHARGING -BATT

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

AMX1 A4 HV MODULE
-BATT START SCR HI/LO STOP CAP START SCR HI/LO STOP CAP COM CAP CHARGE SEE ILL. 15-1 X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL SEE ILL. 15-5 ROTOR CONTROL STOP SCR HI/LO SAFETY CONTACTOR +BATT (STOP CHARGE = -70V) COM CAP RECTIFIER + STOP SCR COM CAP C2 K5 START SCR SCR K6

PRIMARY VOLTS-

AMX1 A6 A1 HV XFMR
P2

AMX2 A3 BATTERIES

COM CAP CHARGE RTN STOP SCR HI/LO SAFETY CONTACTOR +BATT

K4

AUTO XFMR T1 SAFETY CONTACTOR K7

HV XFMR T1

HV RECTIFIER

+ -

L C S

ANODE

K3

X-RAY TUBE

K2

AMX1 A1 A2 DISPLAY
kVp +24V S43 S44 32 J1 34 KVP UP KVP DOWN J6 11 13 OPER I/O STATUS 1400H PROG TIMER 1500H TMR 0

AMX1 A2 A1 CONTROLLER
DRIVERS

J4 24

1 kHz PHASE 2

AMX1 A4 A1 1 kHz INVERTER


24 J1 1 kHz XFMR T120 26 5 1 J4 1 2

K1

16

SCR

PRIMARY VOLTS+

26 GEN CNTRL 1 1200H 1 kHz EN 8 10 GEN CNTRL 2 1000H 6 14 16 18 20 8031 MICROCONTROLLER GEN & AEC STATUS 1600H 6 7 9 13 15 17 19

1 kHz PHASE 1

P1

TAP 6* TAP 5* TAP 4* TAP 3* TAP 2* TAP 1* TAP 6 FDBK TAP 5 FDBK TAP 4 FDBK TAP 3 FDBK TAP 2 FDBK TAP 1 FDBK KV FDBK +/1

J5 8 10 14 16 18 20 7 9 13 15 17 19 J3 2 RECTIFIER 20:1 KV FDBK XFMR T25 J6 6 OPTO ISO'S 6 6 OPTO ISO'S 6 DRIVERS 6 4 5 6 7 8 9

K6 COIL K5 COIL K4 COIL K3 COIL K2 COIL K1 COIL

SEE ILL. 15-4 FILAMENT / mAs CONTROL FILAMENT XFMR T2 L C S CATHODE

PREP SW EXP SW

CRITICAL STATUS 090H P1.0 P1.1

HAND SWITCH
SEE ILL. 15-1 X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL POAD0POAD7 NVRAM DATA BASE

1 3

PRIMARY VOLTSPRIMARY VOLTS+

A/D CNTRL 1280H ANALOG MUX KVP DMN DAC 1584H J5 13 14

KV FDBK +/1 KVP DMN FBK +/13 14 2

J7 AMP J2 AMP

AMX1 A4 A2 FIL / KVP CONTROL

A/D CONVERT 1200H D0-D7 DATA BUS

DETECT KV 75% OF DEMAND

J2 22

X-RAY ON

SEE ILL. 15-1 X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL

KVP DMN +/11 12 11 12 AMP DETECT KV>15KV ABOVE DEMAND J6 2 TRIP BRKR* SEE ILL. 15-9 BATTERY POWER / CHARGING

8031 uC READS OPERATOR'S kVp INPUT AND SETS AUTO XFMR TAPS & KVP DEMAND DAC ACCORDINGLY

15-7

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

15-8

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 154 FILAMENT AND MAS CONTROL AMX1 A1 A2 DISPLAY
mAs +24V S45 S46 33 kVp S43 34 S44 32 J1 31 MAS UP MAS DOWN KVP UP KVP DOWN J6 5 7 11 13 GEN CNTRL 1 1200H PROG TIMER 1500H PREHEAT 2 kHz EN TMR 0 DRIVERS D0-D7 DATA BUS OPER I/O STATUS 1400H

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

AMX1 A2 A1 CONTROLLER
FIL DMN DAC 1580H KVP DMN DAC 1584H J5 7 FIL DMN +/8 7 8 J2 AMP S U M

AMX1 A4 A2 FIL / KVP CONTROL AMX1 A4 HV MODULE


MODULATOR PWM POWER AMP J8 3 8 AMP CURRENT LIMIT CURRENT DETECT FILAMENT XFMR T2 J5 1 PWM RTN 1 PWM RTN 1 XS1 S C L CATHODE PWM E CHOKE L3 PWM L XC

AMX1 A6 A1 HV XFMR

X-RAY TUBE

KVP DMN +/11 12 11 12 AMP

26

PREHEAT 16 kHz CLK

26

15 2 kHz PHASE 1

15

17

17

BUF

FET

8
19

2 kHz PHASE 2 FIL FDBK +/-

19

BUF

FET AMP SHORT DETECT J2

PWM RTN 2 FIL SHORTED SEE ILL. 15-1 X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL

PWM RTN 2

XS2

9 8031 MICROCONTROLLER A/D CONVERT 1200H CRITICAL STATUS 090H P1.0 P1.1 A/D CNTRL 1280H LEAK CMP DAC 1481H ON-BOARD CNTRL 1280H MUX POAD0POAD7 21 5 ANALOG MUX

10

10

25

AMX1 A4 A1 1 kHz INVERTER


J7 AMP LEAKAGE COMP FDBK +/6 5 6 AMP 5-7 mS DELAY X-RAY ON 1 KV FDBK +/2 1 2 J3 RECTIFIER 20:1 KV FDBK XFMR T25

J6

3 1

PREP SW EXP SW

HAND SWITCH
SEE ILL. 15-1 X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL

LEAKAGE COMP +/3 4 3 4 AMP

SEE ILL. 15-3 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION

AMX1 A4 HV MODULE
AUTO XFMR T1 J3 RECTIFIER 1 2 J2

PRIMARY VOLTS+ PRIMARY VOLTS-

P1 P2

PULSE COUNTER T1

MAS

21

100MA = 16kHz NOMINAL

VOLTAGE -TOFREQ CONVERT

S U M

HV XFMR T1

HV RECTIFIER +

L C S

ANODE

MA+ MA-

NVRAM DATA BASE

DURING PREP SEQUENCE, 8031 uC SETS UP DAC'S: - SETS UP FIL DEMAND DAC BASED ON: * OPERATOR'S kVp SELECTION * BATTERY VOLTAGE * CALCULATED EMISSION CURRENT AS DETERMINED BY CAL DATA BASE - SETS KVP DEMAND DAC TO A UNIQUE VALUE FOR EACH OPERATOR'S kVp SELECTION (THIS FINE-TUNES kVp AUTO XFMR TAP SELECTION SEE ILL. 15-3, HIGH VOLTAGE GEN) - SETS UP LEAKAGE COMP DAC TO COMPENSATE FOR HV TANK LEAKAGE OTHERWISE MA VALUE WOULD APPEAR TO BE HIGHER THAN IT ACTUALLY IS. DAC VALUE BASED ON: * OPERATOR'S kVp SELECTION * CAL DATA BASE DURING EXPOSE SEQUENCE, 8031 uC COLLECTS AUTO CAL DATA: - READS FIL FDBK - READS LEAKAGE COMP FDBK - READS KVP DMN FDBK (SEE ILL . 15-3, HV GEN) TO END EXPOSURE, 8031 uC COUNTS MAS PULSES. WHEN PULSE COUNT = OPERATOR-SELECTED mAs, EXPOSURE TERMINATES. (SEE ILL. 15-1, X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL.) AFTER EXPOSURE, 8031 uC UPDA TES AUTO CAL DATA BASE

DURING EXPOSURE, FIL/KVP CONTROL BOARD DRIVES FIL CURRENT UNTIL KV FDBK = KV DMN

MA FDBK XFMR T2

1 3

MA+ MA-

MA+ MA-

SAMPLE

DETECT >150MA

J6 2

TRIP BRKR*

SEE ILL. 15-9 BATTERY POWER / CHARGING

15-9

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

15-10

ssssss

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 155 ROTOR CONTROL AMX1 A3 ROTOR CONTROL & BATTERY CHARGER MODULE
COLL LAMP TRANS A3T2

TO COLL FIELD LAMP A3F7

SEE ILL. 15-9 BATTERY POWER / CHARGING

KEY SWITCH AMX2 A3 BATTERIES


-

KEY SWITCH

AMX1 A3 A1 BATTERY CHARGER

AMX1 A3 A2 ROTOR CONTROL


T1 PHASE 2 6 T1 PRI COM 3 T1 PHASE 1 1 FET 1 T1 SEC COM ROTOR DRIVE XFMR T1

J6

J6

K39 100 VAC J3 3 T6 J4 2 3 J7 PHASE SHIFT E 2

FET K215 +BATT SWITCHED J8 2 K121 F93

J2

PHASE SHIFT CAP C1

PHASE SHIFT L (ROTOR (GRN)

1)

X-RAY TUBE

ROTOR COMM

(WHT)

-BATT B-

T5 J1

ROTOR

(BLK)

HAND SWITCH
PREP SW J8 23

8031 MICROCONTROLLER P1.0 CRITICAL STATUS 090H

D0-D7 DATA BUS

AMX1 A2 A1 CONTROLLER
GEN CNTRL 1 1200H 60 Hz EN

J3 11

60HZ INV RELAY* 60HZ PHASE 1

CURRENT DETECT J1 11 1 OPTO ISO'S DRIVERS 2 27 VAC 27 VAC RTN 80 VAC 80 VAC RTN 6 7 8 9 RECTIFIER OPTO ISO

ROTOR INTLK SEE ILL. 15-1 X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL

5 J4 2 1

60HZ INV OK COM CAP CHARGE COM CAP CHARGE RTN

PROG TIMER 1500H

TMR 2

DRIVERS

15

15

SEE ILL. 15-1 X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL

13 GEN CNTRL 2 1000H

60HZ PHASE 2

13

SEE ILL. 15-3 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION

ROTOR SELECT*

WHEN OPERATOR PRESSES PREP SWITCH, 8031 uC ENABLES 60HZ INVERTER & ROTOR SELECT RELAYS X-RAY TUBE ROTOR MOTION BEGINS.

15-11

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

15-12

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 156 LEFT DRIVE SIGNAL FLOW AMX1 A2 TOP DECK

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

AMX1 A5 A2 DRIVE POWER AMP


J1 3 5 HALL LFT REF 7 J8 +10V REF SUPPLY REF OUT ANALOG MUX A/D CONVERT 1200H LFT SPD DMN DAC 1401H J2 7

AMX1 A2 A1 CONTROLLER

AMX1 A5 A1 DRIVE CONTROL


J9 8 J2 4 AMP S U M VOLTAGE CLAMP VOLTAGE -TOPULSE WIDTH CONVERT DRIVERS LEFT BOT CW* LEFT TOP CW* J9 4 OPTO ISO

J1 2

LEFT V+

AMX1 A5 MOTOR DRIVE MODULE


K1 F1

HALL LFT REF RTN 8

MAGNET

HALL EFFECT SENSOR S3

LFT MAN TDS OUT 4 3

LEFT DRV CMND +/8 7

POWER FET

LEFT VM+ 1

RED

A/D CNTRL 1280H

LEFT DRV FDBK +/3 4 3 4 AMP DIRECTTION DETECT CW CCW

POWER FET

LEFT VM-

BLK LEFT MOTOR AMX2 A1 MTR1

HANDLE ASSM
LEFT

DRIVERS D0-D7 DATA BUS ANALOG MUX J11 NOT J2 17 13 15 16 14 STALL DETECT SEE ILL. 15-9 BATTERY POWER / CHARGING INV STALL RESET* A N D

LEFT TOP CCW*

OPTO ISO

POWER FET

3 5 2

LEFT BOT CCW* LEFT IM+ LEFT IM-

3 5 2

8031 MICROCONTROLLER SEE ILL. 15-7 VEHICLE DRIVE (RIGHT) LEFT DRIVE ENA SW RIGHT DRIVE ENA SW J1

POWER FET

SEE ILL. 15-9 BATTERY POWER / CHARGING DRIVE ENA SW 1 TUBE PARKED SW LINE SENSE SEE ILL. 15-9 BATTERY POWER / CHARGING 27 J8 DRIVE ENA SW FULL SPD ENA DRIVE RESET MOTOR ENA LEFT STALL

PWR OK 3

+5V DRV DRIVE ENA SW

9 J4 17 1 DRIVE ENA

S5

S4

17 CHGR & DRV CONTROL 1100H 13 15 16 14

17

S1 +24V TUBE PARKED SW

TS2

13 6 J1

CHGR & DRV STATUS 1000H

DRIVERS

12 14

LEFT MOTOR ENA BRAKE RELEASE

12 14 INV

INV

LEFT PWR*

NORMALLY OPEN S1: CLOSED = PARKED N.O. = NOT PARKED S4 & S5: BOTH SWITCHES MUST CLOSE FOR FORWARD, REVERSE OR PIVOT MOTION. (PROVIDES A REDUNDANT DEADMAN'S SWITCH.")

+BATT SWITCHED J11 BUMPER #1 BUMPER #2 -BATT

2 1

J10 J7

K145

DS285 10 8031 uC READS CHGR & DRV STATUS PORT: - IF DRIVE ENA SW CLOSED (ACTUATED BY HANDLE), 8031 READS HALL EFFECT SENSOR, OUTPUTS APPROPRIATE VALUE TO LFT SPD DMN DAC - IF TUBE PARKED SW CLOSED, 8031 ASSERTS FULL SPD ENA. IF TUBE PARKED SW OPEN, 8031 NEGATES FULL SPD ENA, REDUCING DRIVE SPEED B Y 50%. - IF THE AC LINE IS SENSED (CHARGE CYCLE), 8031 PROHIBITS VEHICLE DRIVE - IF A BUMPER SWITCH OPENS, 8031 ALLOWS REVERSE MOTION ONLY - IF STALL IS DETECTED, 8031 STOPS MOTOR DRIVE. RELEASING AND RE-APPLYING HANDLE RESETS STALL DETECT. BUMPER* 10 O R IF BUMPER HITS SOMETHING, BUMPER SWITCH OPENS & BUMPER* = TRUE (0V)

1 2

BJ10 1 +BATT J5 1 +BATT

BRAKE RELEASE 1

TUBE PARKED SW HANDLE

AMX2 A2 FRONT BASE


BRAKE RELEASE BUTTON +BATT S6 BRAKE RELEASE BRAKE RELEASE BRAKE RELEASE S1 S2 LEFT BUMPER RIGHT BUMPER BUMPER

LEFT BRAKE SOLENOID AMX2 A1 BRK1

DRIVE WHEEL

15-13

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

15-14

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 157 RIGHT DRIVE SIGNAL FLOW AMX1 A2 TOP DECK
HALL RGT REF

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207


AMX1 A5 A2 DRIVE POWER AMP AMX1 A5 MOTOR DRIVE MODULE
K2 F2

J2

3 5

J8 +10V REF SUPPLY REF OUT ANALOG MUX A/D CONVERT 1200H

AMX1 A2 A1 CONTROLLER

AMX1 A5 A1 DRIVE CONTROL


J9 5 J2 23 AMP S U M VOLTAGE CLAMP VOLTAGE -TOPULSE WIDTH CONVERT DRIVERS RIGHT BOT CW* RIGHT TOP CW* J9 23 OPTO ISO

J2

RIGHT V+ 2 RIGHT VM+ 3

HALL RGT REF RTN 6

MAGNET

HALL EFFECT SENSOR S2

RGT MAN TDS OUT 4 1

RT SPD DMN DAC 1400H

J2

RIGHT DRV CMND +/6 5 6

POWER FET

RED

A/D CNTRL 1280H

RIGHT DRV FDBK +/1 2 1 2 AMP DIRECTTION DETECT CW CCW

19

19

POWER FET

RIGHT VM-

BLK RIGHT MOTOR AMX2 A1 MTR2

HANDLE ASSM
RIGHT

DRIVERS D0-D7 DATA BUS ANALOG MUX J11 NOT J2 17 13 15 16 12 STALL DETECT SEE ILL. 15-9 BATTERY POWER / CHARGING INV STALL RESET* A N D

22

RIGHT TOP CCW*

22

OPTO ISO

POWER FET

24 20 26

RIGHT BOT CCW* RIGHT IM+ RIGHT IM-

24 20 26

8031 MICROCONTROLLER SEE ILL. 15-6 VEHICLE DRIVE (LEFT) LEFT DRIVE ENA SW RIGHT DRIVE ENA SW J1

POWER FET

SEE ILL. 15-9 BATTERY POWER / CHARGING DRIVE ENA SW 1 TUBE PARKED SW LINE SENSE SEE ILL. 15-9 BATTERY POWER / CHARGING 27 J8 DRIVE ENA SW FULL SPD ENA DRIVE RESET MOTOR ENA RIGHT STALL

PWR OK 3

+5V DRV DRIVE ENA SW

9 J4 17 1 DRIVE ENA

S5

S4

17 CHGR & DRV CONTROL 1100H 13 15 16 12

17

S1 +24V TUBE PARKED SW

TS2

13 6 J1

CHGR & DRV STATUS 1000H

DRIVERS

11 14

RIGHT MOTOR ENA BRAKE RELEASE

11 14 INV

INV

RIGHT PWR*

NORMALLY OPEN S1: CLOSED = PARKED N.O. = NOT PARKED S4 & S5: BOTH SWITCHES MUST CLOSE FOR FORWARD, REVERSE OR PIVOT MOTION. (PROVIDES A REDUNDANT DEADMAN'S SWITCH.")

+BATT SWITCHED J11 BUMPER #1 BUMPER #2 -BATT

2 1

J10 J7

K145

DS289 10 8031 uC READS CHGR & DRV STATUS PORT: - IF DRIVE ENA SW CLOSED (ACTUATED BY HANDLE), 8031 READS HALL EFFECT SENSOR, OUTPUTS APPROPRIATE VALUE TO RT SPD DMN DAC - IF TUBE PARKED SW CLOSED, 8031 ASSERTS FULL SPD ENA. IF TUBE PARKED SW OPEN, 8031 NEGATES FULL SPD ENA, REDUCING DRIVE SPEED B Y 50%. - IF THE AC LINE IS SENSED (CHARGE CYCLE), 8031 PROHIBITS VEHICLE DRIVE - IF A BUMPER SWITCH OPENS, 8031 ALLOWS REVERSE MOTION ONLY - IF STALL IS DETECTED, 8031 STOPS MOTOR DRIVE. RELEASING AND RE-APPLYING HANDLE RESETS STALL DETECT. BUMPER* 10 O R IF BUMPER HITS SOMETHING, BUMPER SWITCH OPENS & BUMPER* = TRUE (0V)

1 2

BJ10 1 +BATT J6 1 +BATT

BRAKE RELEASE 2

TUBE PARKED SW HANDLE

AMX2 A2 FRONT BASE


BRAKE RELEASE BUTTON +BATT S6 BRAKE RELEASE BRAKE RELEASE BRAKE RELEASE S1 S2 LEFT BUMPER RIGHT BUMPER BUMPER

RIGHT BRAKE SOLENOID AMX2 A1 BRK2

DRIVE WHEEL

15-15

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

15-16

ssssss

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 158 LEFT & RIGHT DRIVE FUNCTIONAL FLOW +5V-DRV
DRIVE POWER AMP + BATT SWITCHE D MUST HAVE +5VDRV TO ENABLE HIGH SIDE FETS

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

DRIVE CONTROLLER

-8V

+ -

TP16 GOES HIGH (STALL) (19)IF TP1 GETS MORE NEGATIVE THAN 8 VOLTS (10A)
COMPARATOR

NOTE: RIGHT AND LEFT DRIVE CIRCUITS ARE THE SAME. NUMBER IN PARENTHESIS IS FOR RIGHT DRIVE CIRCUIT AMX IV DRIVE CIRCUITRY
FAST STALL

REV B

64A

8A

-5V

+
BATTERY

F9

F1(2)

K1(2)

NORMALLY 0 VOLTS. WILL START TO RISE IF TP1 GETS MORE NEGATIVE THAN 5 VOLTS (6.25A) TP3 (6) +10V

GOES HIGH (STALL) IF TP3 GETS GREATER THAN TP17 +10 VOLTS (18)

DS285 (289)

CHARGE PANEL

HIGH A

HIGH B INTEGRATOR

+ COMPARATOR DELAYED STALL

LATCH
CLR

IF STALL IS HIGH, LED WILL BE ON AND ERROR WILL OCCUR

STALL
OUTPUT OF CONTROLLER BOARD

STALL

LOW A

LOW B TP1 (2) TP4 (9) SELECTABLE AMP TP5 (10)


COMPARATOR

PULSE WILL CLEAR LATCH CLOCK 10.9 KHZ


LOGIC FALL DELAY FALL DELAY FALL DELAY

STALL RESET
TO HIGH SIDE FET A TO LOW SIDE FET A TO HIGH SIDE FET B TO LOW SIDE FET B

DIR

-3.98
.2 OHMS K1(2)

R1(2) DYMANIC BRAKE RESISTOR

MUX
.2 OHMS

DIF F AMP - (.5 X TP4) 5

8 VOLTS/ AMP FEEDBACK

+/-1

TP15 (20)

FALL DELAY

+ -

DIR

LEVEL SHIFTER DIF F AM P 1 TP7 (8)

X 10

+ +
X 6.25

ERROR

+/-1
SELECTABLE AMP

K1(2) DRIVE CONTACTOR + BATT SWITCHE D


BRAKE K145

VOLTAGE TO PULSE WIDTH CONVERTER

STALL
FET SWITCH PWR OK (FROM BATT CHARGE BOARD)

TP11

K145

SHOULD BE 8.7 VOLTS WHEN FULL SPD ENA IS HIGH AND 4.2 VOLTS WHEN FULL SPD ENA IS LO. HAS CAPACITOR DELAY. CLAMPS VOTAGE INTO PULSE WIDTH CONVERTER

FALLING EDGE DELAY PREVENTS HIGH AND LOW SIDE FETS FROM BEING ON AT THE SAME TIME AND DESTROYING THEMSELVES

FULL SPD ENA +5V-DRV

SHORTS TO GND WHEN DRIVE IS NOT ENABLED

DRIVE ENA SW

THESE OUTPUTS ARE INVERTED BY THE FET DRIVERS, THUS A LOW WILL TURN ON THE FET.

HALL OUTPUT WILL RANGE FROM ABOUT 3 TO 7 VOLTS. THIS IS TRANSLATED INTO A 10 TO +10 VOLT COMMAND BY THE SOFTWARE HALL EFFECT SENSOR

RED WHT BLK

3 4 5

DRV FBK SHOULD BE 5 VOLTS WHEN THE UNIT IS NOT MOVING. IT SHOULD MOVE TP15 BELOW 5 VOLTS PIN 25 (26) IN ONE DIRECTION AND ABOVE 5 VOLTS TP22 +10V REF IN THE OTHER. (21)

DRV FBK
DATA BASE

DRIVE COMMAND -10 TO 10V TP19 (18) D/A MOTOR ENA


BUMPER SWITCHES: CLOSE WHEN OBJECT IS HIT

MUX U342

X1

SAMPL HOLD

A/D

SOFTWARE CONTROL

U151-3 U151-4(7) PORTS U264-6 U264-19 U151-13 U151-18 +24V +24V

BUMPER STALL STALL RESET FULL SPD ENA DRIVE ENA SW TUBE PARKED SW

TP29
SQUARE WAVE ONLY WHEN ENABLE BAR IS ENGAGED OTHERWISE CONSTANT 10V ERROR CODES
10 V

SMALL BLACK CONNECTOR OUT OF HANDLE ENDS

HANDLE CHECK

24mS 1mS

WHEN THE ENABLE BAR IS ENGAGED, THIS SIGNAL FORCES THE HALL EFFECT SIGNAL INTO THE MUX TO BE 0 VOLTS FOR A SHORT TIME. THE CPU SOFTWARE CHECKS TO SEE THAT THIS OCCURS (SAFETY FEATURE)

PARK SWITCH: CLOSED WHEN TUBE IS PARKED

ENABLE BAR SWITCH: CLOSED WHEN DRIVE IS ENABLED

15-17

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

15-18

ssssss

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 159 BATTERY POWER AND CHARGING, WITH CHARGER BOARD 46288034 OR 46288786

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

LAMP (NEWER UNITS)

AMX1 A3 ROTOR CONTROL & BATTERY CHARGER MODULE


FAN

+BATT F9 BAT CHARGE+ 1 8A 64A

AMX1 A3 A1 BATTERY CHARGER


117 VAC 1 110 VAC 3 RECTIFIER J5 K150 + F55 F6 SCR J11 F4 CB1 CB1

+BATT

F1

T3

CHOKE L2

F10

+BATT

BLK CORD REEL 117 VAC 60 Hz WH GRN

F2

NEUTRAL 5 -

145 VDC REGULATOR


4

BAT CHARGEC B 1 B A T T + B A T T B R E A K E R O P E N * + + B A T T + B A T T + B A T T + B A T T

FRAME GROUND

PHASE DETECT

RAMP GEN C O M P A R E

AMX1 A2 A1 CONTROLLER
CHGR & DRV STATUS 1000H CHARGE CUR DAC 1480H D0-D7 DATA BUS J1 6

AMX2 A3 BATTERIES
BRAKE RELEASE BUTTON DRIVE MOTORS SAFETY CONTACTOR SEE ILL. 15-3 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION B A T T B A T T

LINE SENSE 6 I-CHARGE CMND 3 3 I-CHARGE RTN 4 4

J1

K216

+24V

K-LINE2 TO K196

AMP

8031 MICROCONTROLLER

S U M TIMES 0.8 OR TIMES 8 AMP AMP

SEE ILL. 15-5 OR 15-6 VEHICLE DRIVE 8 I-CHARGE FBKI-CHARGE FBK+ F5 CB1 BATT -BATT B A T T

VOLTAGE -TOFREQ CONVERT PULSE COUNTER T1 BAT V & CHARGING CUR 5 5 7.8 kHz +/- 25% @ 120V +BATT 4.6 kHz +/- 35% @ 0.5V I-CHRG, AMP @X8 K62 11 +24V

9 J2

-BATT

-BATT

MUX

ANALOG MUX

BSEE ILL 15-5 ROTOR CONTROL

K215

K196

KLINE2

SEE ILLS. 15-10 & 15-11 FOR DETAILED CHARGE & DISCHARGE CYCLE CIRCUIT OPERATION CHARGE CYCLE 8031 uC ISSUES I-CHARGE CMND & CHARGER RELAY* WHEN LINE SENSED 8031 uC ISSUES TRIP BRKR IF CHARGING CUR FEEDBACK IS NOT WITHIN +/- 20% OF EXPECTED VALUE DISCHARGE CYCLE 8031 uC ISSUES TRIP BRKR IF BAT V IS LESS THAN 110V.

ON-BOARD CNTRL 1280H OPERATOR I/O STATUS 1400H 11

KEY SWITCH ON

BAT SWT (+BATT SWITCHED)

+BATT SWITCHED

+BATT SWITCHED B A T T

K150* K149** CHARGER RELAY* 10 10 BAT V & CHARGE CUR SEL

J4 1

KEY SWITCH 1

AMX1 A2 TOP DECK


J1 J1

+BATT 2 SEE ILL. 15-1 X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL

KEY SWITCH 7

AMX1 A2 A2 LOW VOLTAGE LIMITED ENERGY (LVLE) POWER SUPPLY

+24V +15V -15V +5V TO ALL CKT BDS

CHARGER & DRIVE CONTROL 1100H

7 CHARGE SCALE SELECT 12 TRIP BRKR 8

POWER-UP DELAY 4 J10 8 PWR STABLE O R 2 A N D J4 5 PWR OK PWR OK PWR OK PWR OK AMX1 A3 F3

+24V

12

AMX3 A4 COLLIMATOR
S2 S3 S2 & S3 ARE BRAKE RELEASE SWITCHES LOCATED ON COLL HANDLES.

SEE ILL 15-3 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION SEE ILL 15-4 FILAMENT / mAs CONTROL

AMX1 A4 A2 FIL / KVP CONTROL


DETECT KV>15KV ABOVE DEMAND DETECT >150MA J6 O R

BREAKER OPEN*

TRIP BRKR* 2

BREAKER TRIP* 8

J4

AMX1 A2 K1

*K150 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46288034 **K149 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46288786

UPPER COLUMN BRAKE -BATT

ARM BRAKE

LOWER COLUMN BRAKE

TUBE PARKED LATCH

15-19

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

15-20

ssssss

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 1510 BATTERY POWER CHARGE CYCLE WITH CHARGER BOARD 46288034 OR 46288786

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

LAMP (NEWER UNITS)

AMX1 A3 ROTOR CONTROL & BATTERY CHARGER MODULE


FAN

+BATT F9 BAT CHARGE+

AMX1 A3 A1 BATTERY CHARGER


117 VAC 1 110 VAC 3 RECTIFIER J5 K150 + J11 F4 CB1 8A CB1 64A

+BATT

L2

F55

BLK CORD REEL 117 VAC 60 Hz WH GRN

F2

NEUTRAL 5 -

145 VDC REGULATOR

FRAME GROUND

PHASE DETECT

RAMP GEN

AMX1 A2 A1 CONTROLLER
CHGR & DRV STATUS 1000H CHARGE CUR DAC 1480H D0-D7 DATA BUS J1 6

LINE SENSE 6 I-CHARGE CMND 3

J1

K216

+24V

K-LINE2 TO K196

8031 MICROCONTROLLER

I-CHARGE RTN 4 4

AMP

S U M TIMES 0.8 OR TIMES 8 AMP

VOLTAGE -TOFREQ CONVERT PULSE COUNTER T1 BAT V & CHARGING CUR 5 5 7.8 kHz +/- 25% @ 120V +BATT 4.6 kHz +/- 35% @ 0.5V I-CHRG, AMP @X8 K62 11 +24V

MUX

ANALOG MUX

K215

ON-BOARD CNTRL 1280H CHARGE CYCLE 8031 uC ISSUES I-CHARGE CMND & CHARGER RELAY* WHEN LINE SENSED 8031 uC ISSUES TRIP BRKR IF CHARGING CUR FEEDBACK IS NOT WITHIN +/- 20% OF EXPECTED VALUE DISCHARGE CYCLE 8031 uC ISSUES TRIP BRKR IF BAT V IS LESS THAN 110V. OPERATOR I/O STATUS 1400H 11

KEY SWITCH ON

CHARGER RELAY* 10 10 BAT V & CHARGE CUR SEL CHARGER & DRIVE CONTROL 1100H 7 CHARGE SCALE SELECT 12 TRIP BRKR 8 8 12 7

SEE ILL 15-3 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION SEE ILL 15-4 FILAMENT / mAs CONTROL

AMX1 A4 A2 FIL / KVP CONTROL


DETECT KV>15KV ABOVE DEMAND DETECT >150MA J6 O R

O R TRIP BRKR* 2 BREAKER TRIP* 8 J4

NOTE:

*K150 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46288034 **K149 FOR CHARGER BOARD CHARGE CYCLE 46288786 CROSSHATCHED PATH ( ) REPRESENTS CIRCUITRY TO SUPPLY THE LOW VOLTAGE LIMITED ENERGY POWER SUPPLY FROM THE LINE INSTEAD OF FROM THE BATTERIES DURING THE CHARGING CYCLE.

15-21


SCR 1 F6 BAT CHARGE4 C B 1 B A T T + B A T T B R E A K E R + B A T T + B A T T + B A T T C O M P A R E O P E N * +

F1

T3

CHOKE

F10

+BATT

+ B A T T

AMX2 A3 BATTERIES

BRAKE RELEASE BUTTON

DRIVE MOTORS

SEE ILL. 15-5 OR 15-6 VEHICLE DRIVE

SAFETY CONTACTOR SEE ILL. 15-3 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION B A T T

I-CHARGE FBKI-CHARGE FBK+

AMP

F5

-BATT

B A T T

-BATT

B A T T

-BATT

J2

CB1 BATT

B-

K196

KLINE2

SEE ILL 15-5 ROTOR CONTROL

BAT SWT (+BATT SWITCHED)

+BATT SWITCHED

+BATT SWITCHED

K150* K149**

J4

KEY SWITCH

AMX1 A2 TOP DECK

J1

J1

+BATT 2

B A T T +24V +15V -15V +5V TO ALL CKT BDS

KEY SWITCH

SEE ILL. 15-1 X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL

AMX1 A2 A2 LOW VOLTAGE LIMITED ENERGY (LVLE) POWER SUPPLY

POWER-UP DELAY 4 J10 PWR STABLE 2 A N D J4 5 PWR OK PWR OK PWR OK PWR OK AMX1 A3 F3

+24V

AMX3 A4 COLLIMATOR
S2 S3 S2 & S3 ARE BRAKE RELEASE SWITCHES LOCATED ON COLL HANDLES.

BREAKER OPEN*

AMX1 A2 K1

UPPER COLUMN BRAKE -BATT

ARM BRAKE

LOWER COLUMN BRAKE

TUBE PARKED LATCH

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

15-22

ssssss

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11


ILLUSTRATION 1511 BATTERY POWER DISCHARGE CYCLE WITH CHARGER BOARD 46288034 OR 46288786

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

LAMP (NEWER UNITS)

AMX1 A3 ROTOR CONTROL & BATTERY CHARGER MODULE


FAN

+BATT F9 BAT CHARGE+ 1 8A 64A

AMX1 A3 A1 BATTERY CHARGER


117 VAC 1 110 VAC 3 RECTIFIER J5 K150 + F55 F6 SCR J11 F4 CB1 CB1

+BATT

F1

T3

CHOKE L2

F10

+BATT

BLK CORD REEL 117 VAC 60 Hz WH GRN

F2

NEUTRAL 5 -

145 VDC REGULATOR


4

BAT CHARGEC B 1 B A T T + B A T T B R E A K E R O P E N * + + B A T T + B A T T + B A T T + B A T T

FRAME GROUND

PHASE DETECT

RAMP GEN C O M P A R E

AMX1 A2 A1 CONTROLLER
CHGR & DRV STATUS 1000H CHARGE CUR DAC 1480H D0-D7 DATA BUS J1 6

AMX2 A3 BATTERIES
BRAKE RELEASE BUTTON DRIVE MOTORS SAFETY CONTACTOR SEE ILL. 15-3 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION B A T T B A T T

LINE SENSE 6 I-CHARGE CMND 3

J1

K216

+24V

K-LINE2 TO K196

8031 MICROCONTROLLER

I-CHARGE RTN 4 4

AMP

S U M TIMES 0.8 OR TIMES 8 AMP AMP

SEE ILL. 15-5 OR 15-6 VEHICLE DRIVE 8 I-CHARGE FBKI-CHARGE FBK+ F5 CB1 BATT -BATT B A T T

VOLTAGE -TOFREQ CONVERT PULSE COUNTER T1 BAT V & CHARGING CUR 5 5 7.8 kHz +/- 25% @ 120V +BATT 4.6 kHz +/- 35% @ 0.5V I-CHRG, AMP @X8 K62 11 +24V

9 J2

-BATT

-BATT

MUX

ANALOG MUX

BSEE ILL 15-5 ROTOR CONTROL

K215

K196

KLINE2

ON-BOARD CNTRL 1280H CHARGE CYCLE 8031 uC ISSUES I-CHARGE CMND & CHARGER RELAY* WHEN LINE SENSED 8031 uC ISSUES TRIP BRKR IF CHARGING CUR FEEDBACK IS NOT WITHIN +/- 20% OF EXPECTED VALUE DISCHARGE CYCLE 8031 uC ISSUES TRIP BRKR IF BAT V IS LESS THAN 110V. OPERATOR I/O STATUS 1400H 11

KEY SWITCH ON

BAT SWT (+BATT SWITCHED)

+BATT SWITCHED

+BATT SWITCHED B A T T

K150* K149** CHARGER RELAY* 10 10 BAT V & CHARGE CUR SEL

J4 1

KEY SWITCH 1

AMX1 A2 TOP DECK


J1 J1

+BATT 2 SEE ILL. 15-1 X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL

KEY SWITCH 7

AMX1 A2 A2 LOW VOLTAGE LIMITED ENERGY (LVLE) POWER SUPPLY

+24V +15V -15V +5V TO ALL CKT BDS

CHARGER & DRIVE CONTROL 1100H

7 CHARGE SCALE SELECT 12 TRIP BRKR 8

POWER-UP DELAY 4 J10 8 PWR STABLE O R 2 A N D J4 5 PWR OK PWR OK PWR OK PWR OK AMX1 A3 F3

+24V

12

AMX3 A4 COLLIMATOR
S2 S3 S2 & S3 ARE BRAKE RELEASE SWITCHES LOCATED ON COLL HANDLES.

SEE ILL 15-3 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION SEE ILL 15-4 FILAMENT / mAs CONTROL

AMX1 A4 A2 FIL / KVP CONTROL


DETECT KV>15KV ABOVE DEMAND DETECT >150MA J6 O R

BREAKER OPEN*

TRIP BRKR* 2

BREAKER TRIP* 8

J4

*K150 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46288034 **K149 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46288786 DISCHARGE CYCLE (NORMAL SYSTEM OPERATION) TURNING KEY SWITCH ON APPLIES BATTERY VOLTAGE TO LOAD!

AMX1 A2 K1

UPPER COLUMN BRAKE -BATT

ARM BRAKE

LOWER COLUMN BRAKE

TUBE PARKED LATCH

15-23

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

15-24

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

APPENDIX
DECIMAL, HEXADECIMAL AND BINARY EQUIVALENTS
Introduction You will need to change values between decimal, hexadecimal, and binary equivalents when using diagnostics. Many pocket calculators have functions to perform the con versions for you. However, a calculator is not always available when need. This page will help with conversions up to 16 bits or 4 hexadecimal characters when you are un able to use your calculator. When using diagnostics you will need to perform four types of conversions: convert from binary to hexadecimal to write a bit pattern; convert from hexadecimal to binary to read a bit pattern; convert from hexadecimal to decimal to read a value stored as the decimal equivalent of a hexadecimal number; convert from decimal to hexadecimal to write a value stored as the decimal equivalent of a hexadecimal number. Binary to Hexadecimal Work with four bits at a time from your eight bit byte, starting with the least significant bits, when converting from binary to hexadecimal. Compare the least significant four bits of your eight bit word to the table on the upper right. Write down the hexadecimal number from the column titled First Four Bits. Compare the most significant four bits of your eight bit word to the table on the lower right. Write down the hexadecimal number from the column titled Second Four Bits to the left of the number for the first four bits. Repeat the process if you need to convert a second eight bit word using the Third Four Bits and Fourth Four Bits Columns. The hexadecimal equivalent is the number you have written. Hexadecimal to Binary Work with one number at a time, starting with the least significant digit, when convert ing from hexadecimal to binary. Compare the least significant digit to the column la beled First Four Bits in the table on the upper right. Write down the binary number from the far right. Compare the next digit to the column labeled Second Four Bits in the the table on the lower right. To the left of the first number number, write the binary number from the right column. Repeat the process as need to convert a third or fourth digit using the Third Four Bits and Fourth Four Bits Columns to find your digit. The binary equivalent is the number you have written. Hexadecimal to Decimal Work with one number at a time, starting with the least significant digit, when convert ing from hexadecimal to decimal. Compare the least significant digit to the column labeled First Four Bits in the table on the upper right. Write down the decimal number from the column to the left.. Compare the next digit to the column labeled Second Four Bits in the the table on the lower right. Underneath first number number, write the decimal number from the left column. Repeat the process as need to convert a third or fourth digit using the Third Four Bits and Fourth Four Bits Columns to find your digit. The decimal equivalent is the sum number you have written.

Decimal to Hexadecimal This process works for numbers up to 65535. Compare your number to the columns labeled DEC in the tables on the right. Write down the largest decimal number, and it's hexadecimal equivalent, that you can subtract from your number. Perform the sub traction to get your new number. repeat the process until you obtain zero by subtract ing a number from the column labeled First Four Bits. The hexadecimal equivalent is the sum of the hexadecimal numbers you have written. LEAST SIGNIFICANT FOUR BITS
Third Four Bits First Four Bits

DEC 4 3

HEX 2

DEC 1

HEX msb7 lsb0

5 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0000H 0 0 0 256100H 1 0 1 512200H 2 1 0 768300H 3 1 1 1024400H 4 0 0 1280500H 5 0 1 1536600H 6 1 0 1792700H 7 1 1 2048800H 8 0 0 2304900H 9 0 1 2560A00H 10 1 0 2816B00H 11 1 1 3072C00H 12 0 0 3328D00H 13 0 1 3584E00H 14 1 0 3840F00H 15 1 1

0H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 3H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 5H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 6H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 7H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 8H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 9H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 BH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 CH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 DH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 EH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

MOST SIGNIFICANT FOUR BITS


Fourth Four Bits Second Four Bits

DEC 4 3

HEX 2

DEC 1

HEX msb7 lsb0

A-1

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

00000H 0 00H 0 .......... 40961000H 16 10H 1 ....................... 81922000H 32 20H 0 ....................... 122883000H 48 30H 1 ....................... 163844000H 64 40H 0 ....................... 204805000H 80 50H 1 ....................... 245766000H 96 60H 0 ....................... 286727000H 112 70H 1 .......................

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 ....................... 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

327688000H 128 80H 0 ....................... 368649000H 144 90H 1 ....................... 40960A000H 160 A0H 0 ....................... 45056B000H 176 B0H 1 ....................... 49152C000H 192 C0H 0 ....................... 53248D000H 208 D0H 1 ....................... 57344E000H 224 E0H 0 ....................... 61440F000H 240 F0H 1 .......................

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

A-2

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

A-3

Potrebbero piacerti anche